2g-huawei-nsn-parameter-mapping.pdf

Parameters

Table

Recommended value

Frequency Band

Cell_Common

GSM900&DCS1800

MCC

Cell_Common

470

MNC

Cell_Common

02

NCC

Cell_Common

0~7

BCC

Cell_Common

0~7

GPRS Support

Cell_Common

support GPRS

EDGE Support

Cell_Common

No

Cellband

Cell_Common

0

RAC

Cell_Common

As per plan

FH MODE

Cell_Common

As per frequency plan

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell_Common

63

Cell Extension Type

Cell_Common

Normal cell

Cell Antenna Hopping

Cell_Common

None

UL DTX

Cell_Common

Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Cell_Common

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Cell_Common

1

Direct Retry

Cell_Common

Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

DL PC Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

TRX Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

TRX No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Cell Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Site Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Active State

TRx

Activated

Receive Mode

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Basic_Parameter

63

DL DTX

Basic_Parameter

No (tunable based on performance)

Direct Retry

Basic_Parameter

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Basic_Parameter

1

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Basic_Parameter

Yes

UL DTX

Basic_Parameter

Shall Use

Flex HSN Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Flex MAIO Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

Call_Control

3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

Call_Control

3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

Call_Control

2

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

Call_Control

26

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

Call_Control

18

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

Call_Control

12

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

Call_Control

3

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

Call_Control

3

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

Call_Control

2

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

Call_Control

26

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

Call_Control

18

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

Call_Control

12

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)

Call_Control

3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

Call_Control

3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

Call_Control

2

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)

Call_Control

26

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F)

Call_Control

18

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F)

Call_Control

12

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F)

Call_Control

3

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

Call_Control

3

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

Call_Control

2

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F)

Call_Control

26

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F)

Call_Control

18

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F)

Call_Control

12

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

MS MAX Retrans

Call_Control

4

N200 of SDCCH

Call_Control

23

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold

Call_Control

75

T3105(10ms)

HO

7

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.

HO

30

ULQuaLimitAMRHR

HO

60

DLQuaLimitAMRHR

HO

60

ULQuaLimitAMRFR

HO

60

DLQuaLimitAMRFR

HO

60

UL Qual. Threshold

HO

50

DL Qual. Threshold

HO

50

MS Power Prediction after HO

HO

No

Inter-System Handover Enable

HO

No

PBGT HO Allowed

HO

Yes

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed

HO

No

Load HO Allowed

HO

Yes

SDCCH HO Allowed

HO

No

PT(s)

Idle_Mode

0

TO

Idle_Mode

0

Cell_Bar_Qualify

Idle_Mode

0

PI

Idle_Mode

Yes

CRH

Idle_Mode

6dB

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)

Idle_Mode

60(should same for same LAC)

BS-PA-MFRAMS

Idle_Mode

4 Multiframe Period

BS_AG_BLKS_RES

Idle_Mode

1

NCC Permitted

Idle_Mode

255

Cell_Bar_Access

Idle_Mode

0

ATT

Idle_Mode

Yes

T3122(s)

Other_Properties

10

T3111(ms)

Other_Properties

1000

T3109(ms)

Other_Properties

27000

T8(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

T3121(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

T3107(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

T7(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

T3101(ms)

Other_Properties

3000

Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

85

Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

87

Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

92

Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

98

Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

105

Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

110

Filter Length for DL Qual.

Power_Control

5

Filter Length for UL Qual.

Power_Control

4

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

Power_Control

5

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

Power_Control

4

DL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

4

DL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

0

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

Power_Control

20

DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

Power_Control

30

UL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

4

UL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

0

UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

Power_Control

25

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

Power_Control

35

PC Interval

Power_Control

3

Min Access Level Threshold

Data_In_PCU

15

PRACH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

1

PBCCH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

1

GPRS Penalty Time

Data_In_PCU

10sec

GPRS Temporary Offset

Data_In_PCU

10dB

T3192

Data_In_PCU

500ms

T3168

Data_In_PCU

500ms

Default

Description

None

This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is 460.

None

This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).

0

This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).

0

This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.

not support GPRS

This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus

No

This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv

0

As per plan

This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be changed. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. For example, value 0 indic

This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. As per frequency plan If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen

62

This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value

Normal Cell

This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120

None

This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t

Shall Use

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu

1

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is n

Yes

This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi

Yes

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..

65535

255

This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. 2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them is not mandatory.

None

Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047

65535

This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.

Activated

None

62

This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.

This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity. The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main Diversity. The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity. This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout.

8

Yes

Shall Use

Close

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.

Close

This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.

Yes

This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective. Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority preferentially.

15

4

4

63

26

16

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

15

4

4

63

24

14

3

3

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

2

30

22

As per plan

1

2

2

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of As per frequency plan the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

18

12

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

52

This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08. Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value is set to this parameter value. Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power control or channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released.

4 Times

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure. After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval.

23

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

52

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

64

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

85

This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells.

7

This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08. When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical information is Ny1.

30

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts. The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.

60

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.

60

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.

65

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.

65

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.

60

This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.

60

This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed.

No

This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality.

No

This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.

No

This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.

No

This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled. The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted.

No

This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.

0

The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.

0

This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.

No

This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell reselection. 1: barred 0: allowed Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal

Yes

Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used. Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2 equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1.

6dB

This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.

20

This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location update period decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. Generally, a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value in suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots.

2 Multiframe Period

This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel. In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08. If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell increases, thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. For details about the calculation of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. The load of the paging channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The value of this parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load. A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the capacity of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell, must be the same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC.

2

This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH. This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.

11111111

This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages. If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS does not measure the cell level of NCC N.

No

This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA). Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed. Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed. Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority 0 0 Normal Normal 0 1 Barred Barred 1 0 Low Normal 1 1 Low Normal

Yes

This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same. If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources.

10

This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires.

1000

This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.

27000

The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.

10000

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails.

10000

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.

10000

After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.

10000

In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message.

3000

This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.

85

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

87

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

92

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

98

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

105

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

110

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, reports a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

5

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.

5

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.

5

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.

5

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.

3

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

1

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

25

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

35

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

3

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

1

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

20

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

30

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

3

This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands.

15

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a candidate cell for handover.

1

This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs. ... Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs.

1

This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.

10sec

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell.

10dB

When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.

500ms

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving the last data block. When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the same time. If T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. During the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message, the MS responds immediately. If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, it enters the dedicated mode.

500ms

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network. If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 is reset. Otherwise, the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. If the Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink TBF establishment has failed.

Configuration Policy

NSN PARAMETER

Name BAND None None

MCC MNC

This parameter should be set as required. NCC 1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon

BCC

None GENA None EGENA

None BAND

None RAC

None HOP The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

DMAX

None DMAX

None AHOP The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink

DTX

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment RE If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based RXP None DR None DYNAMIC_SDCCH None None

PENA TRX_ID

None

TRX_NUM

None CI None If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated. Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to Not Activated.

BTS_ID

STATE

None

RDIV The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

DMAX

The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX cannot be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell.

DOWNLINK DTX

None DR If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels. RXP The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment lasts for a long time, and therefore the subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It is recommended that this parameter be set to Yes. RE The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. DTX

None HSN1

None

FLEXIBLE MAIO MANAGEMENT

None TRP

None

HRH3

None

HRH2

None

HRH1

None

HRTD3

None

HRTD2

None

HRTD1

None

HRH3

None

HRH2

None

HRH1

None

HRTU3

None

HRTU2

None

HRTU1

None

FRH3

None

FRH2

None

FRH1

None

FRTD3

None

FRTD2

None

FRTD1

None

FRH3

None

FRH2

None

FRH1

None

FRTU3

None

FRTU2

None

FRTU1

If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely to be faulty and therefore call drops occur. If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts before an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource usage is low. This parameter takes effect on the downlink.

RLT

This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1. RET

None T200S The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. AHRLT The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode. ARLT If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target cells.

DRT

The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer T3105 expires for the first time.If the transmission of the physical information over the FACCH is not complete, the expiration is invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH period.Considering the previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable minimum value for this parameter. At present, the default value of this parameter is 70 ms. T3105

The value of this parameter can be increased when handover becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of clock problems or poor transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.

NY1 The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

QURH

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

QDRH

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

QURF

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

QDRF

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. QUR

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. QDR If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.

POPT

None ISHO

Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent channel interference. EPB

It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. FMT

If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.

TRHO When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.

ESD

None PET None TEO

The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system.

QUA

The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to following conditions: Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large. C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving cell in 5s and the following conditions are met: The C2 of a new cell in another LAC minus CRH (broadcast in the system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of the new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell in 5s. A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If a better cell exists, the MS reselects a cell,and does not go to the previous cell within 5s.

PI An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell that the MS camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA changes. HYS

It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with light traffic. To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities involved regarding their processing capability and traffic, such as the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR. The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that in the BSC. In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period. When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the MS is restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell differs from that of the original cell. When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC, it is possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request for a long period. In this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though the called MS is on. In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells. PER

The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the system performance.

MFR

None AG

The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops.

PLMN

The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a common cell, this parameter should be set to 0. The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS.

BAR

None ATT If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. T3122

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. T3111 If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

T3109

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.

T8

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.

T3121

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the assignment success rate.

T3107

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.

T7

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the immediate assignment success rate. T3101

None

BO5

None

BO4

None

BO3

None

BO2

None

BO1

None

BO0

On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. QDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. QUS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. LDS On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. LUS

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

LDR

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

UDR

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. LDR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. UDR

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.

LUR

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded.

UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. LUR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access. UUR If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources. None

INT SL

None PRB

None PBB If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large.

GPET

None GTEO

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources (including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not used but occupied for a long time. If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the TBF resources within a shorter period. However, if the network sends new downlink PDU data packets, the network must initiate a paging or immediate assignment procedure. Therefore, the downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period. If the download data packets from the network are not received and T3192 does not expire, the network directly sends a Packet Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF, thus shortening the TBF establishment time. On one hand, the value of the T3192 timer depends on the average transmission interval between two successive downlink data. On the other hand, you need to comprehensively analyze the traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into consideration. When network resources are sufficient, that is the GPRS congestion rate is low, the T3192 should be set to a large value, shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving data transmission rate. T3192

If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is short, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment decreases. In addition, the small timer value increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet access request, thus increasing the probability of reassignment by the PCU and wasting system resources. If the timer is set to a higher value, the MS takes a longer period to detect the TBF establishment failure. If the TBF establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is long, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases. T3168

Parameter Name

Unit

Step Size

frequency band in use

Default Value GSM 900 (0)

mobile country code mobile network code

BSIC NCC

1

bsIdentityCode

Obligatory in creation when LCSE not connected to any segment, otherwise read from RNW db.

GPRSenabled

N

egprsEnabled

N

frequency band in use

GSM 900 (0)

routing area code

255

HoppingMode

No

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

TA

255

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

TA

255

dtxMode

2

callReestablishmentAllowed

rxLevAccessMin

N

dBm

-105

drInUse

N

powerCtrlEnabled TRX ID

Y 1

CellId

-

BTS ID

Administrative State

Locked (3)

diversityUsed

N

msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

TA

255

drInUse

rxLevAccessMin

N

dBm

-105

callReestablishmentAllowed

N

dtxMode

2

hoppingSequenceNumber1

0

trxPriorityInTCHAlloc

0

amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis3

0.5dB

0

amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis2

0.5dB

2

amrConfigurationHr: hysteresis1

0.5dB

2

radioLinkTimeout

SACCH

maxNumberRetransmission

4

20

4

SDCCH LAPDm T200

AMR HR Radio Link Timeout

AMR Radio Link Timeout

drThreshold

dBm

-100

maxNumberOfRepetitions

5

amrHoHrThrUlRxQual

amrHoHrThrDlRxQual

amrHoFrThrUlRxQual

amrHoFrThrDlRxQual

hoThresholdsQualUL

4

hoThresholdsQualDL

4

msPwrOptLev

dBm

N

enablePwrBudgetHandover

Yes

fastMovingThreshold

SACCH

0

trhoTargetLevel

dBm

N

enableSDCCHHandover

N

penaltyTime

sec

20

20

temporaryOffset

dB

10

0

cellBarQualify

N

cellReselectParamInd

N

cellReselectHysteresis

dB

4

timerPeriodicUpdateMS

hours

0.5

noOfMultiframesBetweenPaging

4

noOfBlocksForAccessGrant

1

plmnPermitted

NCC

cellBarred

N

allowIMSIAttachDetach

Y

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-47

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-90

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-95

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-100

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-105

interferenceAveragingProcess

dBm

-110

pcAveragingQualDL / windows size

SACCH

1

pcAveragingQualUL / windows size

SACCH

1

pcAveragingLevDL / windows size

SACCH

4

pcAveragingLevUL / windows size

SACCH

4

PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual

PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual

PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level

PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level

PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual

PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual

PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level

PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level

powerControlInterval

sec

2

rxLevMinCell

dBm

-100

bsPRACHBlocks

6

bsPBCCHBlocks

3

gprsPenaltyTime

sec

gprsTemporaryOffset

dB

10s

10

0

Range GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5) 3 characters 2...3 characters

0...7

0…7

NoYes

Y/N

GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)

0…255

No/BB/RF

0...255

0...2

Yes/No

-110...-47

Yes/No

Yes/No 1...16

F

1…65535 1...10 characters

Y/N

0...255

Yes/No

-110...-47

Yes/No

0...2

0...63/N

0...2

0…15

0…15

0…15

4...64

1, 2, 4 or 7

-110…-47

5...35

0...7

0...7

-110... -47/ N

Yes/No

0...255

-109... -47/ N

Yes/No

20...640

0...70

Y/N

Y/N

0...14

0 / 0.1...25.5

2...9

0...7

0…7

Yes/No

Yes/No

-47…FIXED

-110...-47

-110...-47

-110...-47

-110...-47

-110…FIXED

1...32

1...32

1...32

1...32

0...31 -110...-47

0…12

1…4

10…320

0…70

Parameter Name

Old Value

UL DTX Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Shall Use NA

Proposed Value Shall Use Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

0

1

TCH Immediate Assignment Direct Retry UL PC Allowed DL PC Allowed

No Yes No No

No Yes Yes Yes

None None

Encryption Algorithm

NA

<10000000>

None

DL DTX

NA

No

Remarks

None Not matched with other vendor

Tunable based on None performance

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

63

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier NA

NO

Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment ATT

NA Yes

Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA frame,4.615ms))

NA

Cell_Bar_Access NCC Permitted BS_AG_BLKS_RES

NA NA NA

NO Yes 20 (32 Satelite Cells) 0 255 1

BS-PA-MFRAMS

4 Multiframe 4 Multiframe Period Period

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)

NA

40

CRH PI Cell_Bar_Qualify CRO(2dB) ACS TO PT(s)

6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 NA

6dB Yes 0 0 No 0 0

SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms))

24

24

RACH Busy Threshold

5

Unit

Bit Period

Ericsson 60

Need to standerdize

To identify MS request 16 at -94 dBm or worst coverage

Paging Times

1

1

Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable

NA

Disable

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold

NA

Speech Version

NA

47

TRX Aiding Function Control

NA

Allowed & Recover When Check Res.

Random Access Error Threshold RACH Min.Access Level T200 SDCCH(5ms) T200 FACCH/F(5ms) T200 FACCH/H(5ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Use LAPDm N200 N200 of Establish N200 of Release N200 of SACCH N200 of SDCCH N200 of FACCH/Half rate N200 of FACCH/Full rate

NA 0 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34

200 1 60 50 50 150 200 60 60 No 5 5 5 23 29 34

Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter

No

No

Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms)

NA

4

Tunable based on performance

Need to discuss with Huawei

Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass

NA

2

MS MAX Retrans

4 (7 for 4 (7 for Satelite Site) Satelite Site)

Common Access Control Class

Not selected Not selected

Special Access Control Class

Not selected Not selected

Emergent Call Disable

NA

No

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms))

20

24

ECSC

Yes

Yes

None

If use Imm_Ass Retrans, Default

All vendor same platform

MBR

0(for normal cell); 2(near to Dualband cell)

0(for normal cell); 2(near to Dualband cell)

Power Deviation Indication Power Deviation(2dB)

Yes 1

Yes 1

Serving Band Reporting

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Qsearch I

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Qsearch C Initial

NA

NA

3G Parameter

FDD Q Offset

NA

NA

3G Parameter

FDD REP QUANT

NA

NA

3G Parameter

FDD MULTIRAT Reporting

NA

NA

3G Parameter

FDD Qmin

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Qsearch P

NA

NA

3G Parameter

3G Search PRIO

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Invalid BSIC Reporting

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Scale Order

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Qsearch C

NA

NA

3G Parameter

900 Reporting Offset

NA

NA

3G Parameter

900 Reporting Threshold

NA

NA

3G Parameter

1800 Reporting Offset

NA

NA

3G Parameter

1800 Reporting Threshold

NA

NA

3G Parameter

FDD Reporting Offset

NA

NA

3G Parameter

FDD Reporting Threshold

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Allow Reassign

No

No

Tunable based on performance

Allow EMLPP Immediate Assignment Opt. Short Message Uplink Disabled Short Message Downlink Disabled

No NA No No

No NO No No

Frequency Band of Reassign

No

Same Band

Max Assignment Retry Times AMR ACS(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) AMR Starting Mode(F) AMR ACS(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H) AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) AMR Starting Mode(H) Co-BSC/MSC Adj SDCCH HO Allowed Intracell HO Allowed

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA No No Yes

2 165 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 1 15 12 18 26 2 3 3 12 18 26 2 3 3 0 No No Yes

Tunable based on performance

None

Tunable based on None performance

Load HO Allowed

No

Yes

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed PBGT HO Allowed Level HO Allowed Fringe HO Allowed BQ HO Allowed TA HO Allowed

No No Yes NA NA NA NA

No No Yes NO Yes Yes Yes

Concentric Circles HO Allowed

NA

Yes (for MB cell), No for othres

Interference HO Allowed Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold Edge HO Watch Time(s) Edge HO Valid Time(s) Layer HO Watch Time(s) Layer HO Valid Time(s) PBGT Watch Time(s) PBGT Valid Time(s) Inter-layer HO Threshold

NA 5 10 5 4 5 4 5 4 NA

Yes 15 20 5 4 5 4 5 4 25

Inter-layer HO Hysteresis

3

3

Tunable based on dB performance

Min DL Level on Candidate Cell

15

10

Tunable based on Grade performance

Intracell F-H HO Allowed Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) F2H HO th H2F HO th Min Interval for TCH HOs Min Interval for SDCCH HOs Min Interval for Consecutive HOs Min Interval for Emerg.HOs Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed Penalty Allowed MS Power Prediction after HO MR.Preprocessing Transfer Original MR Transfer BS/MS Power Class

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 6 NA NA Yes No NA NA Yes

Yes 5 4 30 10 4 2 6 2 NO Yes No Yes NO Yes

Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR

NA

Once Every Second

Allowed M.R Number Lost

NA

4

None None

Grade Grade Second Second Second Second Second Second

Second Second

Second

None

None

Number of MR

Filter Length for TCH Level

6

6

Number of MR

Filter Length for TCH Qual Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual

NA 2 NA

6 2 3

None

Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV

6

6

Filter Length for TA

6

6

Penalty Level after HO Fail Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) Penalty Level after BQ HO Penalty Time after BQ HO(s) Penalty Level after TA HO Penalty Time after TA HO(s)

NA NA NA NA NA NA

30 10 30 10 63 10

Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s)

NA

30

TA Threshold DL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO Filter Parameter A1 Filter Parameter A2 Filter Parameter A3 Filter Parameter A4 Filter Parameter A5 Filter Parameter A6 Filter Parameter A7 Filter Parameter A8 Filter Parameter B No Dl Mr.HO Allowed No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit System Flux Threshold for Load HO Load HO Threshold Load Req.on Candidate Cell Load HO Bandwidth Load HO Step Period Load HO Step Level MS Fast-moving Watch Cells MS Fast-moving Valid Cells MS Fast-moving Time Threshold MAX Consecutive HO Times Forbidden time after MAX Times Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) UL Expected Level at HO Access

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 5 5 NA NA NA NA 20 6 NA NA 35

255 50 50 40 40 30 35 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 0 Yes 60 8 10 5 2 25 10 5 NA NA 15 3 20 6 30 40 35

Number of MR Number of MR

dB dB

None None None None None None None None None

dB Second dB None None Times Second Second dB Grade

Need to discuss with Huawei

K Bias

NA

0

UL to OL HO Allowed OL to UL HO Allowed RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed TA for UO HO Allowed UO Signal Intensity Difference RX_LEV Threshold RX_LEV Hysteresis RX_QUAL Threshold TA Threshold TA Hysteresis UO HO Watch Time(s) UO HO Valid Time(s)

Yes Yes NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 0 NA NA

Yes Yes Yes Yes No 0 40 NA 50 63 0 5 4

None None None None None None None dB None Bit Period Bit Period Second Second

Assign Optimum Layer

System optimization

System optimization

None

Assign-optimum-level Threshold TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref.

NA NA NA NA

35 63 No 0

dBm Bit Period None Bit Period

Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC

System optimization

System optimization

None

OtoU HO Received Level Threshold UtoO HO Received Level Threshold UtoO Traffic HO Allowed

Underlaid subcell NA NA NA

Underlaid subcell 20 35 Yes

Traffic Threshold of Underlay

NA

Underlay HO Step Period(s) Underlay HO Step Level Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail

NA NA NA NA NA NA

5 5 5 30 5 3

Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Better 3G Cell HO Allowed

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Inter-RAT HO Preference

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer

None Grade Grade None Need to discuss with Huawei Second None Second Second Second None

HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell

NA

NA

3G Parameter

RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

NA

NA

3G Parameter

3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s)

NA

NA

3G Parameter

3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s)

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT

NA

NA

3G Parameter

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. T3105(10ms) PC Interval UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold UL Qual. Upper Threshold UL Qual. Lower Threshold DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold DL Qual. Upper Threshold DL Qual. Lower Threshold

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

30 7 NA 35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

NA

4

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

NA

NA

Filter Length for UL Qual.

NA

4

Filter Length for DL Qual. MR. Compensation Allowed

NA NA

NA Yes

UL MR. Number Predicted

NA

1

None 10 ms Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade SACCH Period SACCH Period None Number of MR

DL MR. Number Predicted

NA

1

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 1 MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2 MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff BTS PC Class AMR PC Interval

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

6 4 2 6 16 8 5 10 5 10 16 3

AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

NA

4

AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

NA

4

AMR Filter Length for UL Qual

NA

4

AMR Filter Length for DL Qual.

NA

4

AMR MR. Compensation Allowed

NA

Yes

Number of MR dB dB dB dB dB dB None dB None dB Grade None SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period SACCH Period None

AMR UL MR. Number Predicted

NA

1

MR Number

AMR DL MR. Number Predicted

NA

1

MR Number

AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

35 25 0 4 30 20 0 4

Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade Grade

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0

NA

6

dB

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 1

NA

4

dB

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2

NA

2

dB

AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.

NA

6

dB

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV

NA

16

dB

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.

NA

8

Grade

AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff AMR BTS PC Class Idle SDCCH Threshold N1

NA NA NA NA NA NA

5 10 5 10 16 2

dB None dB None dB None

Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed

80 60 NA

80 60 Yes

None Second None

Idle TCH Threshold N1

NA

Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m)

NA

1

Minute

TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%)

NA

50

Percentage

Interf. Priority Allowed Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed Allocation TRX Priority Allowed History Record Priority Allowed Balance Traffic Allowed Interf.of UL Level Threshold Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold Interf.of DL Level Threshold Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes NA NA NA NA

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 30 50 25 50

Filter Length for TCH Level

6

6

Filter Length for TCH Qual.

6

6

Filter Length for SDCCH Level Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. Updata Period of CH Record(min) Updata Freq.of CH Record AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed

2 2 NA NA NA

2 2 30 2 Yes

None None None None None Grade Grade Grade Grade Number of MR Number of MR None None Minute None

AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold

NA

2

TCH req suspend interval(s) Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid Subcell Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Underlaid Subcell

NA

60

NA

Yes

NA

30

NA

30

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted

NA

Data service Allowed

NA

SMCBC DRX Cell Load0 Threshold Cell Load1 Threshold Cell Load2 Threshold Cell Load3 Threshold Cell Load4 Threshold Cell Load5 Threshold Cell Load Change Delay

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Need to discuss with Huawei

Second

Need to discuss with Huawei <011011100 0> Yes 20 40 55 70 80 90 3

None None

Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold

NA

Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm) Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)

NA NA NA NA NA NA

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms)) NA

Need to discuss with Huawei 110 105 98 92 87 85 20 Need to discuss with Huawei

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB)

NA

Frame Start Time DC Bias Voltage Threshold Power Output Error Threshold Power Output Reduction Threshold VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold VSWR TRX Error Threshold Radio Resource Report Period(s) CCCH Load Indication Period(s) CCCH Load Threshold Overload Indication Period

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA 15

65535 3 2 2 2 2 10 15 80 15

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number

NA

5000

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) Included Angle(Degree)

NA NA

360 360

PWRC

Not selected Yes

Second

Discard BCCH TS Power while calculating Power Control in BBHopping

Support Half Rate Abis Flow Control Permitted Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Directly Magnifier Site Flag

5 (900), 0 (1800) NA Yes NA NA

5 (900), 0 (1800) Yes Yes 15 No

Second None

Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout)

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response)

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error)

NA

1

None

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) NA

1

None

NA

1

None

NA

1

None

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other)

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Release Indication

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Equipment Failure

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Resource Check

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout

NA

1

None

Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout

NA

1

None

Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch T3101(ms) ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) T3103A(ms) T3103C(ms) T7(ms) T3107(ms) T3121(ms) T8(ms) T3109(ms) T3111(ms) TREESTABLISH(ms) T3122(s)

NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA NA

Yes 3000 5000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000 27000 1000 15000 10

None ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access fail) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available)

Parameters

Table

Recommended Value Single band 900MHz

Multiband

Default

Frequency Band

Cell_Common

GSM900

GSM900&DCS1800

Administrative State

Cell_Common

Unlocked

Unlocked

Layer of the Cell

Cell_Common

3

3

3

MCC

Cell_Common

470

470

None

MNC

Cell_Common

02

02

None

NCC

Cell_Common

0~7

0~7

0

BCC

Cell_Common

0~7

0~7

0

Cell Priority

Cell_Common

Prior-1

Prior-1

Prior-1

Activity Status

Cell_Common

Activated

Activated

Activated

PCU

Cell_Common

255

255

255

GPRS Support

Cell_Common

support GPRS

support GPRS

not support GPRS

Support Baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

EDGE Support

Cell_Common

No

No

No

8PSK power attenuation grade

Cell_Common

0

0

0

Support NACC

Cell_Common

No

No

No

Support PACKET SI STATUS

Cell_Common

No

No

No

Support NC2

Cell_Common

No

No

No

PCU Support 64 Neighbor Cells

Cell_Common

No

No

No

Level report switch

Cell_Common

Support

Support

Support

Cellband

Cell_Common

0

2

0

RAC

Cell_Common

As per plan

As per plan

As per plan

Support DTM

Cell_Common

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Support Enhanced DTM Cell_Common

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Encryption Algorithm

Cell_Common

00000001

00000001

1

FH MODE

Cell_Common

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

DL DTX

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Cell_Common

62

62

62

Cell Extension Type

Cell_Common

Normal cell

Normal cell

Normal Cell

Cell Antenna Hopping

Cell_Common

None

None

None

Enhanced Concentric Allowed

Cell_Common

No

Yes

Yes

Cell Type

Cell_Common

Normal Cell

Concentric Cell

Normal cell

Attributes of UL And OL Cell_Common Subcells

NONE

NONE

NONE

BCCH Concentric Attribute

Cell_Common

None

Underlaid Subcell

None

UL DTX

Cell_Common

Shall Use

Shall Use

Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Cell_Common

1

1

1

TCH Immediate Assignment

Cell_Common

No

No

No

Direct Retry

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL PC Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

DL PC Allowed

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier

Cell_Common

Yes

Yes

Yes

Allow Dynamic Voltage Cell_Common Adjustment

Yes

Yes

Yes

TRX Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

65535

TRX No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

255

Cell Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

Site Index

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

65535

Board Type

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

Active State

TRx

Activated

Activated

Activated

Abis Mode

TRx

Auto

Auto

Auto

Cabinet No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

0

Subrack No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

0

Slot No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

TEI

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

0

Out-BSC Subrack No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

0

Out-BSC Slot No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

Out-BSC Port No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

None

Out-BSC Timeslot No. (8K)

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

255

RSL In Site Port No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

255

RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K)

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

255

RSL Logic No.

TRx

Depend on invidual site

Depend on invidual site

2048

Hop Type

TRx

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

None

Power Level

TRx

0

0

0

Power Type

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Default

HW_Concentric Attribute

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Depends on BTS/site configuration

None

TRX Priority

TRx

Level0

Level0

Level0

Shut Down Enable

TRx

Enable

Enable

Enable

TCH Rate Adjust Allow

TRx

Yes

Yes

No

TRX 8PSK Level

TRx

0

0

0

Wireless Link Alarm Flag

TRx

No

No

No

Abnormal Release Statistic Base

TRx

100

100

100

Abnormal Warn Threshold

TRx

100

100

100

Abnormal Release Threshold

TRx

50

50

50

Statical Period of Notraffic(5min)

TRx

48

48

48

Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit

TRx

Yes

Yes

Yes

WLA Prompting Recover Period(5min)

TRx

12

12

12

Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour)

TRx

8

8

8

End Time of WLA Detection(hour)

TRx

Up Down Balance Basic TRx Difference

22

22

22

8

8

8

Up Down Balance Floating Range

TRx

30

30

30

Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold

TRx

80

80

80

Receive Mode

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Depends on BTS/site configuration

None

Send Mode

TRx

Depends on BTS/site configuration

Depends on BTS/site configuration

None

Allow Shutdown of TRX TRx Power Amplifier

Yes

Yes

No

Antenna Hopping Index TRx

No

No

No

Power Finetune

TRx

Default

Default

Default

TRX Antenna Hopping

TRx

None

None

None

Reverse Out-BSC Slot No.

TRx

255

255

255

Reverse Out-BSC Port No.

TRx

255

255

255

Reverse Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K)

TRx

255

255

255

Reverse RSL In Site Port No.

TRx

255

255

255

Reverse RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K)

TRx

255

255

255

Transmission Type of Abis Interface

TRx

TDM

TDM

TDM

Maximum PDCH numbers of carrier

TRx

8

8

8

MaxAbisTSOccupied

TRx

32

32

32

Co-TRX for Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT)

TRx

255

255

255

InHDLCIndex

TRx

65535

65535

65535

HubHDLCIndex

TRx

65535

65535

65535

TRXNoInHub

TRx

255

255

255

XPUSlotNo

TRx

0

0

0

TRX Ability

TRx

1

1

PhysicalPassNo

TRx

1

1

Priority

TRx

NONE

QTRU Priority

TRx

255

255

RevInHDLCIndex

TRx

65535

65535

65535

Time Slot Power Rerserve

TRx

0

0

0

Allow Dynamic Voltage Basic_Parameter Adjustment

Yes

Yes

Yes

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km))

Basic_Parameter

63

63

62

DL DTX

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

Encryption Algorithm

Basic_Parameter

1

1

1

DL PC Allowed

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL PC Allowed

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

Direct Retry

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

TCH Immediate Assignment

Basic_Parameter

No

No

No

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Basic_Parameter

1

1

8

Call Reestablishment Forbidden

Basic_Parameter

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL DTX

Basic_Parameter

Shall Use

Shall Use

Shall Use

GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share Threshold

CH_MGT

25

25

25

Channel Assignment Allowed for Insufficient CH_MGT Power

No

No

Yes

Qtru Down Link Path Loss Compensation

CH_MGT

4

4

4

Qtru Estimate Bts Power

CH_MGT

35

35

35

Qtru Down Power Inadequate Last Time

CH_MGT

3

3

3

Qtru Down Power Inadequate Stat Time

CH_MGT

5

5

5

Qtru Power Sharing

CH_MGT

None

None

None

Observed time of uplink received level difference

CH_MGT

5

5

5

Duration of uplink received level difference

CH_MGT

4

4

4

Smooth factor of uplink CH_MGT received level

6

6

6

100

100

100

Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels

CH_MGT

Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold

CH_MGT

50

50

50

Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid CH_MGT Subcell

50

50

50

Flex HSN Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Close

Close

Flex MAIO Switch

CH_MGT

Close

Close

Close

Fix Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%)

80

80

80

Flex Abis Prior Choose CH_MGT Abis Load Threshold(%)

80

80

80

TCH req suspend interval(s)

CH_MGT

60

60

60

AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold

CH_MGT

40

40

40

AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed

CH_MGT

As per plan

As per plan

As per plan

Update Freq.of CH Record

CH_MGT

2

2

2

Update Period of CH Record(min)

CH_MGT

30

30

30

2

2

2

Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Qual.

Filter Length for SDCCH CH_MGT Level

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

Filter Length for TCH Qual.

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

6

Filter Length for TCH Level

CH_MGT

6

6

4

Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold

CH_MGT

40

40

40

Interf.of DL Level Threshold

CH_MGT

25

25

25

Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold

CH_MGT

40

40

40

Interf.of UL Level Threshold

CH_MGT

10

10

10

History Record Priority CH_MGT Allowed

Yes

Yes

Yes

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

Interf. Priority Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%)

CH_MGT

1

50

50

TIGHT BCCH Switch

CH_MGT

No

No

No

Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) CH_MGT Supported

Not Support

DPBT

Not Support

Channel Allocate Strategy

CH_MGT

Capability preferred

Capability preferred

Capability preferred

Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed

CH_MGT

Yes

Yes

Yes

TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s)

CH_MGT

60

60

60

Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum

CH_MGT

80

80

80

Idle SDCCH Threshold N1

CH_MGT

2

2

2

AMR Starting Mode(H)

Call_Control

2

2

2

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

Call_Control

10

10

15

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

Call_Control

4

4

4

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

Call_Control

2

2

4

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

Call_Control

30

30

63

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

Call_Control

18

18

26

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

Call_Control

12

12

16

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H)

Call_Control

10

10

15

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(H)

Call_Control

4

4

4

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H)

Call_Control

2

2

4

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H)

Call_Control

30

30

63

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(H)

Call_Control

18

18

24

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H)

Call_Control

12

12

14

AMR ACS(H)

Call_Control

1101

1101

1101

AMR Starting Mode(F)

Call_Control

2

2

2

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.hyst3(F)

6

6

3

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.hyst2(F)

4

4

3

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F)

2

2

2

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th3(F)

38

38

30

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th2(F)

28

28

22

Call_Control

AMR DL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th1(F)

As per plan

As per plan

As per plan

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.hyst3(F)

5

5

1

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst2(F)

Call_Control

2

2

2

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.hyst1(F)

4

4

2

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th3(F)

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th2(F)

Yes

Yes

18

AMR UL Coding Rate Call_Control adj.th1(F)

20

20

12

11100100

11100100

11100100

2

2

1

AMR ACS(F)

Call_Control

Max Assignment Retry Call_Control Times

Frequency Band of Reassign

Call_Control

Same Band

Different Band

Different Band

Short Message Downlink Disabled

Call_Control

No

No

No

Immediate Assignment Call_Control Opt.

No

No

No

Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch

No

No

No

Call_Control

Allow EMLPP

Call_Control

No

No

No

Allow Reassign

Call_Control

Yes

Yes

Yes

TDD Cell Threshold

Call_Control

1

0

0

TDD Cell offset

Call_Control

0

0

0

Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control

1

1

1

TDD Cell Reselect Diversity(dB)

Call_Control

8

8

8

FDD Reporting Threshold

Call_Control

0

0

0

FDD Reporting Offset

Call_Control

0

0

0

1800 Reporting Threshold

Call_Control

0

0

0

1800 Reporting Offset

Call_Control

0

0

0

900 Reporting Threshold

Call_Control

0

0

0

900 Reporting Offset

Call_Control

0

0

0

Qsearch C

Call_Control

15

15

15

Scale Order

Call_Control

+0dB

+0dB

+0dB

Invalid BSIC Reporting

Call_Control

No

No

No

3G Search PRIO

Call_Control

Yes

Yes

Yes

Qsearch P

Call_Control

15

15

15

FDD Qmin

Call_Control

0

0

0

FDD MULTIRAT Reporting

Call_Control

2

2

2

FDD REP QUANT

Call_Control

RSCP

RSCP

RSCP

FDD Q Offset

Call_Control

8

8

8

Qsearch C Initial

Call_Control

Use Qsearch_I

Use Qsearch_I

Use Qsearch_I

Qsearch I

Call_Control

15

15

15

Serving Band Reporting Call_Control

3

3

3

Power Deviation(2dB)

Call_Control

1

1

1

Power Deviation Indication

Call_Control

Yes

Yes

Yes

MBR

Call_Control

0

0

0

ECSC

Call_Control

No

Yes

NO

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))

24

24

52

Emergent Call Disable

No

No

No

00000

00000

00000

Call_Control

Special Access Control Call_Control Class

Common Access Control Class

Call_Control

0000000000

0000000000

0000000000

MS MAX Retrans

Call_Control

4 Times

4 Times

4 Times

Max Transmit Times of Call_Control Imm_Ass

2

2

2

Max Delay of Imm_Ass Call_Control Retransmit(ms)

4

4

4

Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter

Call_Control

No

No

No

N200 of FACCH/Full rate

Call_Control

34

34

34

N200 of FACCH/Half rate

Call_Control

29

29

29

N200 of SDCCH

Call_Control

23

23

23

N200 of SACCH

Call_Control

5

5

5

N200 of Release

Call_Control

5

5

5

N200 of Establish

Call_Control

5

5

5

Use LAPDm N200

Call_Control

No

No

No

T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms)

Call_Control

60

60

60

T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms)

Call_Control

60

60

60

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms)

Call_Control

200

200

200

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms)

Call_Control

150

150

150

T200 FACCH/H(5ms)

Call_Control

50

50

50

T200 FACCH/F(5ms)

Call_Control

50

50

50

T200 SDCCH(5ms)

Call_Control

60

60

60

RACH Min.Access Level(dbm)

Call_Control

-115

-115

-115

Random Access Error Threshold

Call_Control

200

200

180

TRX Aiding Function Control

Call_Control

Allowed & Recover When Check Res

Allowed & Recover When Check Res

TRX Aiding Not Allowed

Speech Version

Call_Control

11

11

11

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))

24

24

52

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period Call_Control (480ms))

24

24

64

AHR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

24

32

AFR SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

24

48

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold

Call_Control

75

75

85

Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable

Call_Control

Disable

Disable

Disable

Paging Times

Call_Control

2

2

4

RACH Busy Threshold

Call_Control

16

16

16

SACCH MultiFrames(SACCH period (480ms))

Call_Control

24

24

31

T3105(10ms)

HO

7

7

7

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info.

HO

30

30

30

TDD Better 3G Cell HO HO Allowed

No

No

0

TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Valid Time(s)

4

4

4

TDD 3G Better Cell HO HO Watch Time(s)

5

5

5

TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

HO

50

50

50

TDD HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell

HO

25

25

25

TDD Inter-RAT HO Preference

HO

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Quick Handover Offset(dB)

HO

68

68

68

Quick Handover Punish HO Value(dB)

63

63

63

Quick Handover Punish HO Time(s)

10

10

10

Ignore Measurement Report Number

HO

1

1

1

Neighbor Cell Filter Length MR Number

HO

4

4

4

Serving Cell Filter Length MR Number

HO

4

4

4

Quick Handover Last Time (0.5s)

HO

3

3

3

Quick Handover Static Time(0.5s)

HO

4

4

4

Quick Move Speed Threshold(m/s)

HO

80

80

80

Quick Handover Down Trigger Level(dB)

HO

63

63

63

Quick Handover Up Trigger Level(dB)

HO

63

63

63

Inner Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold(%)

90

90

90

Number of Satisfactory HO Measurements(s)

As per plan

As per plan

As per plan

Total Number of Measurements(s)

HO

5

5

5

Inter UL And OL Subcells HO Penalty Time(s)

HO

5

5

5

Outgoing OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB)

25

25

25

Incoming OL Subcell HO HO level Threshold(dB)

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

As per frequency plan

Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO(dB)

HO

Yes

Yes

5

OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period(s)

HO

10

10

10

Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled

HO

No

No

No

Modified Step Length of HO UL Load HO Period(s)

1

1

1

Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO(dB)

HO

5

5

5

UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Period(s)

HO

5

5

5

Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries of HO UL And OL Subcells(dB)

2

2

2

Distance Between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells(dB)

HO

10

10

10

Allowed Flow Control Level of UL And OL Subcell HO

HO

10

10

10

UL Subcell Serious HO Overload Threshold(%)

90

90

90

UL Subcell General HO Overload Threshold(%)

1

80

80

Assignment Optimization of OL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not

No

No

No

Assignment Optimization of UL HO Subcell Allowed Or Not

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL Subcell Lower Load HO Threshold(%)

50

50

50

Better 3G Cell HO Allowed

No

No

No

4

4

4

HO

3G Better Cell HO Valid HO Time(s)

3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s)

HO

5

5

5

Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

HO

35

35

35

RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO

HO

50

50

50

HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell

HO

25

25

25

Inter-RAT HO Preference

HO

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold

Ps UtoO HO Received Level Threshold

HO

35

35

35

Ps OtoU HO Received Level Threshold

HO

25

25

25

ReceiveQualThrshAMR HO HR

60

60

60

ReceiveQualThrshAMRF HO R

65

65

65

HO

5

5

5

En Iuo In Cell Load HO Classification HO Period

5

5

5

En Iuo Out Cell Serious HO OverLoad Threshold

90

90

90

En Iuo Out Cell General HO OverLoad Threshold

85

85

85

En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Step

En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold

HO

30

30

20

MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail

HO

3

3

3

Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s)

HO

10

10

10

Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s)

HO

40

40

40

Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s)

HO

10

10

10

Underlay HO Step Level HO

5

5

5

Underlay HO Step Period(s)

HO

5

5

5

UtoO Traffic HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

UtoO HO Received Level Threshold

HO

32

32

35

OtoU HO Received Level Threshold

HO

18

18

25

Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer

HO

Underlaid Subcell

Underlaid Subcell

Underlaid Subcell

Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC

HO

System Optimization

System Optimization

System Optimization

0

0

0

TA Threshold of ImmeHO Assign Pref.

TA Pref. of ImmeAssign Allowed

HO

No

No

No

TA Threshold of Assignment Pref.

HO

63

63

63

Assign-optimum-level Threshold

HO

35

35

35

System Optimization

System Optimization

System Optimization

Assign Optimum Layer HO

UO HO Valid Time(s)

HO

4

4

4

UO HO Watch Time(s)

HO

5

5

5

TA Hysteresis

HO

0

0

0

TA Threshold

HO

63

63

63

RX_QUAL Threshold

HO

50

50

60

RX_LEV Hysteresis

HO

5

5

5

RX_LEV Threshold

HO

35

35

35

UO Signal Intensity Difference

HO

0

0

0

TA for UO HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

OL to UL HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

UL to OL HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO

HO

80

80

80

RX_QUAL Threshold for HO TIGHT BCCH HO

4

4

3

K Bias

HO

0

0

0

UL Expected Level at HO Access

HO

30

30

30

Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s)

HO

40

40

40

Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO

HO

30

30

30

Interval for Consecutive HO Jud.

HO

6

6

6

Forbidden time after MAX Times

HO

20

20

20

MAX Consecutive HO Times

HO

3

3

3

MS Fast-moving Time Threshold

HO

15

15

15

MS Fast-moving Valid Cells

HO

2

2

2

MS Fast-moving Watch HO Cells

3

3

3

Load HO Step Level

HO

5

5

5

Load HO Step Period

HO

10

10

10

Load HO Bandwidth

HO

25

25

25

Load Req.on Candidate HO Cell

75

75

75

Load HO Threshold

HO

85

85

85

System Flux Threshold HO for Load HO

10

10

10

ULQuaLimitAMRHR

HO

60

60

60

DLQuaLimitAMRHR

HO

60

60

60

ULQuaLimitAMRFR

HO

60

60

65

DLQuaLimitAMRFR

HO

60

60

65

RXLEVOff

HO

5

5

5

RXQUAL12

HO

50

50

50

RXQUAL11

HO

51

51

51

RXQUAL10

HO

52

52

52

RXQUAL9

HO

53

53

53

RXQUAL8

HO

54

54

54

RXQUAL7

HO

55

55

55

RXQUAL6

HO

56

56

56

RXQUAL5

HO

57

57

57

RXQUAL4

HO

58

58

58

RXQUAL3

HO

59

59

59

RXQUAL2

HO

60

60

60

RXQUAL1

HO

70

70

70

Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit

HO

8

8

8

No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit

HO

60

60

60

No Dl Mr.HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

Filter Parameter B

HO

0

0

0

Filter Parameter A8

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A7

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A6

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A5

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A4

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A3

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A2

HO

10

10

10

Filter Parameter A1

HO

10

10

10

UL Qual. Threshold

HO

60

60

60

DL Qual. Threshold

HO

60

60

60

Emergency HO TA Threshold

HO

255

255

255

DtxMeasUsed

HO

Open

Open

Open

CfgPenaltyTimer

HO

255

255

255

UmPenaltyTimer

HO

10

10

10

RscPenaltyTimer

HO

5

5

5

Filter Length for TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK

HO

6

6

6

Filter Length for SDCCH HO NBR_RCVD_BLOCK

2

2

2

Penalty Time after AMR HO TCHF-H HO Fail(s)

30

30

30

HO

6

6

6

Filter Length for SDCCH HO REP_QUANT

2

2

2

Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP

HO

6

6

6

Filter Length for SDCCH HO CV_BEP

2

2

2

Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT

Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP

HO

6

6

6

Filter Length for SDCCH HO MEAN_BEP

2

2

2

Penalty Time after TA HO(s)

HO

30

30

30

Penalty Level after TA HO

HO

63

63

63

Penalty Time after BQ HO(s)

HO

15

15

15

Penalty Level after BQ HO

HO

63

63

63

Penalty Level after HO HO Fail

30

30

30

Filter Length for TA

HO

6

6

4

Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV

HO

6

6

4

Filter Length for SDCCH HO Qual

3

3

2

Filter Length for SDCCH HO Level

3

3

2

Filter Length for TCH Qual

HO

6

6

4

Filter Length for TCH Level

HO

6

6

4

Allowed M.R Number Lost

HO

4

4

4

Min Power Level For Direct Try

HO

25

25

16

Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR

HO

Twice every second

Twice every second

Twice every second

Transfer BS/MS Power Class

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Transfer Original MR

HO

Yes

Yes

No

MR.Preprocessing

HO

No

No

No

MS Power Prediction after HO

HO

No

No

No

Penalty Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed

HO

No

No

No

Min Interval for Emerg.HOs

HO

6

6

4

Min Interval for Consecutive HOs

HO

6

6

4

Min Interval for SDCCH HO HOs

2

2

2

Min Interval for TCH HOs

4

4

2

HO

ATCBHoSwitch

HO

Open

Open

Open

TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time(s)

HO

2

2

2

TIGHT BCCH HO Watch HO Time(s)

3

3

3

Quick Handover Enable HO

NO

NO

NO

H2F HO Threshold

HO

10

10

10

F2H HO Threshold

HO

30

30

25

Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s)

HO

4

4

4

Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s)

HO

5

5

5

Intracell F-H HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

YES

Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell

HO

15

15

15

Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell

HO

10

10

10

Inter-layer HO Hysteresis

HO

3

3

3

Inter-layer HO Threshold

HO

25

25

25

Inter-System Handover HO Enable

No

No

No

PBGT Valid Time(s)

HO

2

2

2

PBGT Watch Time(s)

HO

3

3

3

Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO

2

2

2

Layer HO Watch Time(s)

HO

3

3

3

Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time(s)

HO

2

2

2

Edge HO AdjCell Watch HO Time(s)

3

3

3

Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO

2

2

2

Edge HO Watch Time(s) HO

3

3

3

Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold

HO

20

20

20

Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold

HO

10

10

10

Interference HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Concentric Circles HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

TA HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

BQ HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Fringe HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Level HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

PBGT HO Allowed

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

Load HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

Intracell HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

SDCCH HO Allowed

HO

No

No

No

Co-BSC/MSC Adj

HO

Yes

Yes

Yes

PT(s)

Idle_Mode

0

0

0

TO

Idle_Mode

0

0

0

ACS

Idle_Mode

No

No

No

CRO(2dB)

Idle_Mode

0

0

0

Cell_Bar_Qualify

Idle_Mode

No

No

No

PI

Idle_Mode

Yes

Yes

Yes

CRH

Idle_Mode

6dB

6dB

6dB

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes)

Idle_Mode

60

60

20

BS-PA-MFRAMS

Idle_Mode

4 Multiframe Period

4 Multiframe Period

2 Multiframe Period

BS_AG_BLKS_RES

Idle_Mode

2

2

2

NCC Permitted

Idle_Mode

11111111

11111111

11111111

Cell_Bar_Access

Idle_Mode

No

No

No

Tx-integer

Idle_Mode

32

32

32

ATT

Idle_Mode

Yes

Yes

Yes

Timer for UL Data Forward(ms)

Other_Properties

10

10

10

WaitforRelIndAMRHR

Other_Properties

26000

26000

26000

WaitforRelIndAMRFR

Other_Properties

34000

34000

34000

T3103C(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T3122(s)

Other_Properties

10

10

10

TREESTABLISH(ms)

Other_Properties

15000

15000

15000

T3111(ms)

Other_Properties

1000

1000

1000

T3109(ms)

Other_Properties

27000

27000

27000

T8(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T3121(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T3107(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T7(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

T3103A(ms)

Other_Properties

10000

10000

10000

ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms)

Other_Properties

5000

5000

5000

T3101(ms)

Other_Properties

3000

3000

3000

Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Other_Properties Enable

No

No

No

Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Qtru Signal Merge Switch

Other_Properties

No

No

No

MAX Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period

Other_Properties

220

220

220

Average Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period

Other_Properties

180

180

180

Paging Numbers of one Other_Properties Optimizing Msgs

5

5

5

Interval For Sending Paging Optimizing Msgs

Other_Properties

2

2

2

Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface

Other_Properties

Forced turn-on

Forced turn-on

Forced turn-on

Interfere Band Stat Algorithm Type

Other_Properties

Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Lower-level sublink resources preemption switch

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Interference Band Interference Band Measurement Measurement Algorithm II Algorithm II

Interference Band Measurement Algorithm II

Sublink resources preemption switch

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

IntraCellHo to Ass SWITCH

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Frequency Scan Result Other_Properties Type

Maximum/Mean Value

Maximum/Mean Value

Maximum/Mean Value

Drop Optimize IntraOther_Properties Cell Handover Timeout

1

1

1

Drop Optimize IntraBsc Out-Cell Handover Other_Properties Timeout

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Other_Properties Handover Timeout

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Resource Check

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Equipment Failure

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Release Other_Properties Indication

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other)

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not available)

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM Other_Properties intervention)

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO Other_Properties access fail)

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail)

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error)

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM response)

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout)

Other_Properties

1

1

1

Directly Magnifier Site Flag

Other_Properties

No

No

No

Aiding Delay Protect Time(min)

Other_Properties

15

15

15

Abis Flow Control Permitted

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Support Half Rate

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

No

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH

Other_Properties

5

5

5

PWRC

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

ActGene

Other_Properties

5

5

5

PS LowPri ServicePRI

Other_Properties

6

6

6

PS HighPRI ServicePRI

Other_Properties

4

4

4

CS Data ServicePRI

Other_Properties

5

5

5

CS Voice ServicePRI

Other_Properties

3

3

3

Included Angle(Degree) Other_Properties

360

360

360

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree)

Other_Properties

360

360

360

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number

Other_Properties

5000

5000

5000

Overload Indication Period

Other_Properties

15

15

15

CCCH Load Threshold

Other_Properties

80

80

80

CCCH Load Indication Period(s)

Other_Properties

15

15

15

Radio Resource Report Other_Properties Period(s)

10

10

10

Frequency Adjust Value Other_Properties

36671

36671

36671

Frequency Adjust Switch

Other_Properties

NO

NO

NO

VSWR TRX Error Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

VSWR TRX Unadjusted Other_Properties Threshold

2

2

2

Power Output Reduction Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

Power Output Error Threshold

Other_Properties

2

2

2

DC Bias Voltage Threshold

Other_Properties

3

3

3

Frame Start Time

Other_Properties

65535

65535

65535

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB)

Other_Properties

5

5

5

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms))

Other_Properties

20

20

20

Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

85

85

85

Interf. Band Threshold 4 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

87

87

87

Interf. Band Threshold 3 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

92

92

92

Interf. Band Threshold 2 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

98

98

98

Interf. Band Threshold 1 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

105

105

105

Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm)

Other_Properties

110

110

110

Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold

Other_Properties

3

3

50

SMCBC DRX

Other_Properties

Yes

Yes

Yes

Data service Allowed

Other_Properties

118

118

118

StartUp

StartUp

not StartUp

Power boost before HO Other_Properties enabled or not

Voice quality report switch

Other_Properties

report

report

not report

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted

Other_Properties

255

255

Yes

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 8(dB)

53

53

53

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 7(dB)

50

50

50

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 6(dB)

47

47

47

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 5(dB)

43

43

43

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 4(dB)

40

40

40

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 3(dB)

30

30

30

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 2(dB)

20

20

20

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain Power_Control 1(dB)

0

0

0

HwIII UL MAX UpStep(dB)

Power_Control

8

8

8

HwIII UL MAX DownStep(dB)

Power_Control

8

8

8

HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

12

12

12

HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

12

12

12

HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

22

22

22

HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

22

22

22

HwIII UL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold

20

20

20

HwIII UL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold

30

30

30

Power_Control

6

6

6

HwIII UL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor

4

4

4

HwIII UL Rex Qual. Slide Window

Power_Control

1

1

1

HwIII UL RexLev Slide Window

Power_Control

1

1

1

HwIII UL Rex Qual.Exponent Filter Length

Power_Control

3

3

3

HwIII UL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length

3

3

3

HwIII DL MAX UpStep (dB)

Power_Control

8

8

8

HwIII DL MAX DownStep(dB)

Power_Control

8

8

8

12

12

12

HwIII UL Rex Qual.Adjust Factor

HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual. Power_Control Lower Threshold(dB)

HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

12

12

12

HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

22

22

22

HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

16

16

16

HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB)

Power_Control

22

22

22

HwIII DL RexLev Lower Power_Control Threshold

25

25

25

HwIII DL RexLev Upper Power_Control Threshold

35

35

35

Power_Control

6

6

6

HwIII DL RexLev Adjust Power_Control Factor

6

6

6

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Slide Window

Power_Control

1

1

1

HwIII DL RexLev Slide Window

Power_Control

1

1

1

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Adjust Factor

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Power_Control Exponent Filter Length

3

3

3

HwIII DL RexLev Power_Control Exponent Filter Length

3

3

3

HwIII Traffic Channel Discard MR Number

Power_Control

3

3

3

HwIII Signal Channel Discard MR Number

Power_Control

1

1

1

HwIII Down Link Power Power_Control Control Adjust Period

3

3

3

HwIII Up Link Power Control Adjust Period

Power_Control

3

3

3

HwIII Number of lost MRs allowed

Power_Control

5

5

5

AMR BTS PC Class

Power_Control

16

16

16

AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff

Power_Control

0

0

0

AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold

Power_Control

5

5

5

AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff

Power_Control

0

0

0

AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Power_Control Threshold

5

5

5

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.

8

8

8

Power_Control

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV

Power_Control

16

16

16

AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Power_Control Value by Qual.

4

4

4

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2

Power_Control

4

4

4

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 1

Power_Control

4

4

4

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 0

Power_Control

4

4

4

AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

2

2

3

AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

0

0

1

AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold

30

30

25

AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold

40

40

35

AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

2

2

3

AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

0

0

1

AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Power_Control Threshold

25

25

20

AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Power_Control Threshold

35

35

30

AMR DL MR. Number Predicted

Power_Control

2

2

0

AMR UL MR. Number Predicted

Power_Control

2

2

0

Yes

Yes

Yes

AMR MR. Power_Control Compensation Allowed

AMR Filter Length for DL Qual.

Power_Control

6

6

6

AMR Filter Length for UL Qual

Power_Control

6

6

6

AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

Power_Control

6

6

6

AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

Power_Control

6

6

6

AMR PC Interval

Power_Control

3

3

3

BTS PC Class

Power_Control

16

16

16

DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control

0

0

0

DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold

Power_Control

5

5

5

UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control

0

0

0

UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold

5

5

5

Power_Control

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual.

Power_Control

8

8

8

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV

Power_Control

16

16

16

MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual.

Power_Control

4

4

4

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2

Power_Control

4

4

4

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 1

Power_Control

4

4

4

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0

Power_Control

4

4

4

DL MR. Number Predicted

Power_Control

2

2

0

UL MR. Number Predicted

Power_Control

2

2

0

MR. Compensation Allowed

Power_Control

Yes

Yes

Yes

Filter Length for DL Qual.

Power_Control

5

5

5

Filter Length for UL Qual.

Power_Control

5

5

5

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV

Power_Control

5

5

5

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV

Power_Control

5

5

5

Power Control Algorithm Switch

Power_Control

HWII Power Control

HWII Power Control

HW-II Power Control

DL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

2

2

3

DL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

0

0

1

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

Power_Control

30

30

25

DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

Power_Control

40

40

35

UL Qual. Lower Threshold

Power_Control

2

2

3

UL Qual. Upper Threshold

Power_Control

0

0

1

UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold

Power_Control

25

25

20

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold

Power_Control

35

35

30

PC Interval

Power_Control

3

3

3

Constant of Filtering the Collision Signal Strength for Power Control

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Measured Receive Power Level Channel

Data_In_PCU

pdch

pdch

pdch

BTS Power Attenuation on PBCCH

Data_In_PCU

-2dB

-2dB

-2dB

Signal Strength Filter Period in Transfer Mode

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Signal Strength Filter Period in Idle Mode

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Initial Power Level

Data_In_PCU

14

14

14

Alpha Parameter

Data_In_PCU

1

1

1

Maximum Value of N3105

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Maximum Value of N3103

Data_In_PCU

3

3

3

Maximum Value of N3101

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Release Delay of Downlink TBF(ms)

Data_In_PCU

2400

2400

2400

Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF(ms)

Data_In_PCU

2000

2000

2000

Release Delay of Nonextended Uplink TBF(ms)

Data_In_PCU

120

120

120

Load Reselect Level Threshold

Data_In_PCU

40

40

40

GPRS Quality Threshold

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold

Data_In_PCU

16

16

16

EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold

Data_In_PCU

7

7

7

Cell Reselect Interval(s)

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold

Data_In_PCU

1

1

1

Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Cell Normal Reselection Allowed

Data_In_PCU

Permit

Permit

Permit

Cell Load Reselection Allowed

Data_In_PCU

Permit

Permit

Permit

Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed

Data_In_PCU

Permit

Permit

Permit

2G/3G Cell Reselection Strategy

Data_In_PCU

Preference for 2G Cell

Preference for 2G Cell

Preference for 2G Cell

Filter Window Size

Data_In_PCU

6

6

6

Allowed Measure Report Missed Number

Data_In_PCU

4

4

4

Load Reselection Receive Threshold(%)

Data_In_PCU

60

60

60

Load Reselection Start Threshold(%)

Data_In_PCU

85

85

85

MS Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold(%)

Data_In_PCU

30

30

30

MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold

Data_In_PCU

200

200

200

Cell Penalty Last Time(s)

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Cell Penalty Level

Data_In_PCU

30

30

30

Cell Reselection Hysterisis

Data_In_PCU

6

6

6

Min Access Level Threshold

Data_In_PCU

15

15

15

Support QoS Optimize

Data_In_PCU

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

No handover No handover No handover between between underlaid between underlaid underlaid subcell subcell and overlaid subcell and and overlaid subcell overlaid subcell subcell

PS Concentric Cell HO Strategy

Data_In_PCU

Transmission Delay of POC Service

Data_In_PCU

650

650

650

Max. GBR for POC Service

Data_In_PCU

16

16

16

Min. GBR for POC Service

Data_In_PCU

6

6

6

Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS

Data_In_PCU

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS

Data_In_PCU

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Support Gbr QoS

Data_In_PCU

Not Support

Not Support

Not Support

Downlink Default MCS Type

Data_In_PCU

MCS6

MCS6

MCS6

Downlink Fixed MCS Type

Data_In_PCU

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

Uplink Default MCS Type

Data_In_PCU

MCS2

MCS2

MCS2

Uplink Fixed MCS Type

Data_In_PCU

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

BEP Period

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

Link Quality Control Mode

Data_In_PCU

LA

LA

LA

Down TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Down TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Down TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Down TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

Downlink Default CS Type

Data_In_PCU

CS2

CS2

CS2

Downlink Fixed CS Type

Data_In_PCU

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

Up TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS2

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS1

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Up TBF threshold From CS3 to CS4

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Up TBF threshold From CS2 to CS3

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Up TBF threshold From CS1 to CS2

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

Uplink Default CS Type

Data_In_PCU

CS1

CS1

CS1

Uplink Fixed CS Type

Data_In_PCU

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

UNFIXED

Background Service Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

THP3 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

1

1

1

THP2 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

3

3

3

THP1 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

5

5

5

ARP3 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

1

1

1

ARP2 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

3

3

3

ARP1 Priority Weight

Data_In_PCU

6

6

6

Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot

Data_In_PCU

15

15

15

Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel

Data_In_PCU

All dynamic channels can be pre-empted

All dynamic channels can be pre-empted

All dynamic channels can be preempted.

Timer of Releasing Idle Dynamic Channel

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric Cell

Data_In_PCU

Only convert at UL

Only convert at UL

only convert dynamic channel at UL

PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold

Data_In_PCU

80

80

80

PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold

Data_In_PCU

70

70

70

Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Maximum Ratio Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell

Data_In_PCU

30

30

30

MultiBand reporting

Data_In_PCU

Report the frequencies of six strongest cells

Report the frequencies of six strongest cells

Report the frequencies of six strongest cells

Threshold of HCS Signal Strength

Data_In_PCU

-110dB

-110dB

-110dB

Cell HCS Prior Class

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Maximum TX Power for Access PCH

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Minimum Receiving level for Access

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

Exclusive Access

Data_In_PCU

Not Exclusive

Not Exclusive

Not Exclusive

Cell Access Bar Switch

Data_In_PCU

Permit Cell Access

Permit Cell Access

Permit Cell Access

Accessorial Hysteresis of Cell Selection In New Routing Area

Data_In_PCU

2dB

2dB

2dB

Cell Reselection Forbidden Time

Data_In_PCU

10sec

10sec

10sec

Allow MS to Access to another Cell

Data_In_PCU

Yes

Yes

Yes

Exceptional Rule for GPRS Reselect Offset

Data_In_PCU

0

0

0

GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Applied to C31 Criterion or not

Data_In_PCU

c31standard

c31standard

c31standard

GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis

Data_In_PCU

2dB

2dB

2dB

Support PSI Status Message

Data_In_PCU

No

No

No

Allow MR Command or not

Data_In_PCU

No

No

No

PSI1 Repetition Period

Data_In_PCU

6

6

6

Persistence Level 4

Data_In_PCU

16

16

16

Persistence Level 3

Data_In_PCU

14

14

14

Persistence Level 2

Data_In_PCU

13

13

13

Persistence Level 1

Data_In_PCU

12

12

12

Extension Transmission Timeslots of Random Access

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Minimum Timeslots between Two Successive Channel Requests

Data_In_PCU

20

20

20

Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 4

Data_In_PCU

7

7

7

Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 3

Data_In_PCU

7

7

7

Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 2

Data_In_PCU

7

7

7

Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 1

Data_In_PCU

7

7

7

Access Control Class

Data_In_PCU

0

0

0

PRACH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

1

1

1

PAGCH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

4

4

4

PBCCH Blocks

Data_In_PCU

1

1

1

Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode

Data_In_PCU

0.96sec

0.96sec

0.96sec

Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode

Data_In_PCU

15.36sec

15.36sec

15.36sec

Non-DRX Period

Data_In_PCU

0.24sec

0.24sec

0.24sec

GPRS Reselection Offset

Data_In_PCU

-2db

-2db

-2dB

GPRS Penalty Time

Data_In_PCU

10sec

10sec

10sec

GPRS Temporary Offset

Data_In_PCU

10dB

10dB

10dB

Extension MR Period

Data_In_PCU

60sec

60sec

60sec

Extension MR Type

Data_In_PCU

type1

type1

type1

Interference Frequency

Data_In_PCU

1

1

1

NCC_PERMITTED

Data_In_PCU

1

1

1

Extension Measurement Command

Data_In_PCU

em0

em0

em0

BSS Paging Coordination

Data_In_PCU

Yes

Yes

Yes

Support 11BIT EGPRS Access

Data_In_PCU

Yes

Yes

Yes

Routing Area Color Code

Data_In_PCU

1

1

1

Packet Access Priority

Data_In_PCU

Packet access of level 4

Packet access of level 4

Packet access of level 4

Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH

Data_In_PCU

No

No

No

Network Control Mode

Data_In_PCU

nc0

nc0

nc0

Pan Max.

Data_In_PCU

12

12

12

Pan Increment

Data_In_PCU

4

4

4

Pan Decrement

Data_In_PCU

2

2

2

BS_CV_MAX

Data_In_PCU

10

10

10

Control Acknowledge Type

Data_In_PCU

Four access pulses by default

Four access pulses Four access pulses by default by default

Access Burst Type

Data_In_PCU

8bit

8bit

8bit

Max. Duration of DRX(s)

Data_In_PCU

4

4

4s

T3192

Data_In_PCU

500ms

500ms

500ms

T3168

Data_In_PCU

500ms

500ms

500ms

Network Operation Mode

Data_In_PCU

Network Network Operation Network Operation Operation Mode Mode II Mode II II

Description

This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network designed by Huawei has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella, numbered 1-4 respectively. The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. It m

This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is 460.

This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).

This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide. The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).

This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.

This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer. If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the cells at the same layer have the same priority. For details, refer to Layer of the Cell. This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status can be Not Activated or Activated.

This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the Pb interface.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus

The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by an EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2 dB. The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC) function. In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure. When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status message to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the system message. The BSC sends th This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2) function. In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells to the BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells. In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report the number of neighbor cells. For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the default value is Invalid and cannot be manually modified. That is, the main and diversity level cannot be reported. For other types of BTSs, the default value is Support and can be manually modif This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be changed. GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band. DCS1800: The cell This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state performs location management based on the routing area. Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message. For example, value 0 indic This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) function. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS service at the same time. The function requires the support of the BSC.

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function. Compared with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup and release. When the CS service is set up, the PS service is not disrupted.

This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A

This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen

This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.

This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement the extended cell. A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay. Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120 This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function. In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a concentric cell. If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the receive level of the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell. TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with different radiuses form a concentric cell. Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL

This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the UL subcell. In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell. In This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is n

This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed. When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..

This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.

This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS. The following two points should be paid attention to: 1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers may be discontinuous. 2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them is notmust mandatory. Cell Index be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047. Internal 2G cells: 0-2047 External 2G cells: 2048-5047 External 3G cells: 5048-8047

This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.

This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS.

This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.

This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML. The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the Abis time slot of OML automatically.

This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet.

This parameter specifies the number of a subrack.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located.

This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer. This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.

This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is located.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in the TC subrack, which is connected to the local subrack. This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the semi-permanent link. When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 31. When the semi-permanent is configured on the timeslot optical interface optical This parameter specifies thelink number of the out-BSC occupiedboard, by theeach E1 port interface board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62. over the Abis interface. The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0 is used for synchronization and cannot be otherwise used. The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For example, 0-3 specifies the first to the fourth 8 kbit/s sub-timeslot of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot. Accordingly, the timeslot numbering is likewise.

If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.

If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.

This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring topology, the forward and reverse links share one number. Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC. This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used. If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where the TRX serves does perform FH. The FH average interference and This parameter specifies thenot transmit power level ofcan therealize TRX. The greater this frequency parameter diversity. is, the smaller the transmit power is. When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest. Each time this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power reduces by 2 dB. For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different. BTS3X: 0-10 BTS3001C: 0-13 BTS3002C: 0-10 Double-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012，BTS3012AE，BTS3006C): 0-10 DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A This parameter specifies the power levels GSM：0-10 supported by a TRX. The macro BTS and the mini BTS support different power levels.

This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric cell, this parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions; if the cell is not a concentric one, this parameter is set to None by default.

This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment algorithm.

This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX automatically for saving power when thecan BTS is powered by batteries the external This parameter specifies whether a cell convert full rate channels after to half rate power supply is cut off. channels, or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels. If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is set to No, the conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be forcedly restored; the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly restored. This parameter also specifies whether the channel supports the dynamic adjustment priority in the channel assignment algorithm. In the channel assignment, the channels on the TRX not supporting the dynamic adjustment are assigned first, to ensure the This parameter the power levels of the TRX. There are 50 channels on thespecifies TRX supporting theattenuation dynamic adjustment areEDGE used for dynamic levels, and the attenuation between levels is 0.2are dB.satisfied. adjustment. Thus, the access requests of users The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK signals. Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm parameter is sent; otherwise, the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent. This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a sub-channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N (the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a timeslot that are activated). For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds Abnormal Warn Threshold, an alarm is generated. If the percentage of abnormally released channels is less than or equal to Abnormal Release Threshold, the BSC sends the corresponding recovery alarm. If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release alarm is generated.

If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel activation is less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release clear alarm is sent.

If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold, the notraffic alarm is generated.

This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover Period. If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio link prompt alarm is not cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the critical wireless link alarm is sent or not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit. The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter, the BTS detects the wireless link alarm, and sends an alarm related.

The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each day. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter, the BTS stops detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. The detection starts again until the next Beginthe Time of WLA Detection(hour). This parameter specifies basic difference value caused by the specified level

difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Together with Up Down Balance Floating Range, this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink and downlink unbalance. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power This parameter specifies the permissible uplink andthan downlink floating range control compensation is greater than 8+30 or less 8-30, balance the uplink and the relative Upnot Down Balanceotherwise, Basic Difference. Theand uplink and downlink is not balanced downlinktoare balanced; the uplink downlink are balanced. only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range. Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power control compensation is greater than 8+30 or less than 8-30, the uplink and the downlink are not balanced; otherwise, the uplink and downlink are balanced. When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated. This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU. The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four Diversity Receiver, or Main This parameter specifies theDiversity. RF transmit mode of the TRX. The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main The RF transmit mode can be Not Support, No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Diversity. Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY, DPBT, or Transmitter The DBS3900orGSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Independent Combining. Diversity. The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT. The DBS3900 GSM GRRU supports No Combining, Diversity Transmitter and DDIVERSITY. The BTS3900 GSM and BTS3900A GSM support No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT. The BTS3012 supports No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Power Booster This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power Technology, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT. amplifier a included TRX based on the volume. The BTSs of not above dotraffic not support the RF tranmsit modes listed above.

This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used, the signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX corresponding to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on certain frequencies are less affected by Rayleigh fading those without antenna hopping. The Antenna This parameter specifies thecompared following: with Currently, when the BSC performs the static Hopping Indexon corresponds to step a TRX power control the TRX, the ofnumber. increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2 dB. In some scenarios, the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different tributaries, and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus, the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna adjusted in the step of 2 dB, so the TRX output power may behopping. different from the cabinet In GSM cell, the of frequency, topa output power the BTS. frame number, system information, and paging group are transmitted on the BCCH of the of main TRX. Ifathe MSstep is incan an be unfavorable position Therefore, through the setting thisBCCH parameter, finer provided for or the antenna for thetop main BCCH TRX is then the MS cannot receive the adjusting the cabinet output power offaulty, the BTS. broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly. The antenna hopping function enables the data on all the timeslots of the BCCH TRX to be transmitted on the antennas of all the TRXs in the cell in turn. Thus the quality of the BCCH TRX data received by the MS is improved and the network performance is This parameter the number of BTS the out-BSC slot wherewith the BSC interfacehopping board enhanced. Only specifies the double-transceiver can be configured the antenna is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the slot that function. holds the interface board, which connects the BTS to the BSC. This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. However, it must This parameter specifies theslot number ofconfigured the out-BSC port where the BSC interface board be set to the number of the that is with the interface board. is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the port on the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC. When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 31. When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the optical interface board, each optical interface board is configured with 63 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 62. If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the RSL timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port.

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.

This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-HDLC, 2HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs on a TRX.

This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default value 255, you can infer that no TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX.

This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-BTS HDLC channel connects to the BTS TMU.

This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU.

This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC transmission mode.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL signaling) is located.

This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.

This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring network.

This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power.

This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell. After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell. This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side. The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4, A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer that the BSS does not support the corresponding encryption algorithm. The eights bits cannot be all zeros and the least significant bit must be 1. This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell. Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS and the network layout. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH when receiving an initial access request. This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details. see GSM Rec. 05.08. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks on.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS supports multiple sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The BSC ignores the priority of PGSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this threshold. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, P-GSM frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC preferentially assigns channels on the R-GSM TRXs if the MS supports P-GSM/E-GSM/RGSM parameter sub frequency bands and thethe cellchannel is configured with TRXs operating This determines when is assigned on the QTRU: on the PGSM/E-GSM/R-GSM frequency bands. When the channel issub assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required power of cell, If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise, this is not allowed to assign the channel. The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss.

This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. This parameter specifies the following definitions: 1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled. The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is 2. Static power sharing algorithm. insufficient. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. 3. Dynamic power sharing algorithm. The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing algorithm is that the dynamic power sharing algorithm uses the MCPA power sharing technology, the static power specification is different from dynamic power specification. When there are several carriers, the maximum output power of single carrier in dynamic power specification is greater. In the network swapping, the static/dynamic power on the top of cabinet needs to If the uplink received level difference ofthe calls in of the same timeslot exceeds the compare with the competitor power on top cabinet. If the static power on the top Threshold the difference between the power situation must algorithm be of cabinet of ≥ competitor power on theuplink top ofreceived cabinet, levels, the static sharing recorded. During the observation of Ptop seconds, if this lasts N seconds, theof call is used; if the dynamic power on the of cabinet ≥ situation competitor power on the top with the≥lowest in the timeslot should be handed to another cabinet staticuplink powersignal on thestrength top of cabinet, the dynamic power sharingover algorithm is timeslot. used. If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot. The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously multiplied by 10specifies times to the prevent floating-point values. that is, the BSC monitors the This parameter QTRUthe signal merge algorithm, high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the calls should be handed over to another timeslot. P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N specifies the Duration of uplink received level difference.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid subcell and overlaid subcell. The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, halfrate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric The assigns channels in the overlaid to the MS in a concentric cell.isIfset theto cell. BSC When the Allow Rate Selection Basedsubcell on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load channel ratioBusy of overlaid subcell greaterfor than value of cell. this parameter, halfYes, the seizure TCH Traffic Threshold (%) is invalid thethe concentric rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned. Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load isthe setdynamic to Yes, the TCH Traffic Busy This parameter specifies whether HSN is permitted to Threshold be used. (%) is invalid for frequency the concentric cell. function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, When the hopping this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced. Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured. This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO. In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference among channels occur. When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially. In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes. This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the static Abis resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the full-rate channel is preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-rate or half-rate channel is preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load. When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is preferred. This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the TCH, this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. The parameter is type validto forbeboth built-in and according external PCU. The channel assigned is PCH decided to the channel types that are

allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell. During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other cases, the TCHFspecifies or TCCH,whether TCHF Prior required. assigned on the basis of This parameter thechannels TCH/H is are preferentially For channel details about cell current load levels, refer to the Cell Load Threshold. the type and service channel seizure ratio that are allowed by the MSC. Relevant AMR call channel assignment During thealgorithm: channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH,algorithms TCHH Prior channels are required in

the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by The updating of the history record starts Period of CH Record times the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is when set to the Yes,Update and the percentage of seized TCHs out. Update of CH Record is subtracted from the priority of eachIn channel in the cell is Freq greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Priorhistory Cell Load Threshold. other to improve the priority of theTCHF channel. cases, the TCHF or TCCH, Prior channels are required. Principles takingPeriod values follows: When the of Update ofare CH as Record expires, the process of updating the history Generally, set thisoccupancy parameteristostarted. 2. record of channel That is, the history priority of each channel is If a fixedby interference source orat anthe equipment fault update frequency reduced Update Freq.of CHexists Record interval of theoccurs, settingthe value of this for the affected cells can set to 4priority. or 6. parameter to increase thebe channel The Update Period values of CH Record used together with Update Freq of CH Record, In this Principles of taking are as is follows: way, the channel can be assigned even channel priority isthe continuously lowered Generally, a high-frequency adjustmentifisthe used. For example, update period should within time. be set a inperiod such aof way that it ranges from half an hour to one hour because several busy hours are the major concerns during the actual operation in a day. If the parameter is set to a too small value, the result of the history record is meaningless. If the parameter is setparameter to a too great value, the result cannot be seen inreports time during busy hours. This specifies the number of measurement that are used to If a fixed interference sourceon exists or anchannels. equipment fault occurs, the update period for determine the signal quality signaling the affected cells can be set in channels such a way that it ranges from several hours one day. The signal quality on signaling should not be determined based on to only one This parameter is used Freq. of CH Record so that channel measurement result. To together eliminatewith the Update influence of accidental factors, youthe need to obtain can be assigned even if the quality history in record priority decreases. the average value of signal several successive measurement reports of signaling channels, and then determine the signal quality on signaling channels.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate the signal quality on speech/data TCHs. The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs, and then determine the signal quality on speech/data TCHs. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink interference is existed. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the signal quality is. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level This parameter specifies of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink Threshold and the qualityone grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value interference is existed. Interf of DL Qual Threshold. The downlink interference occurs. The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the signal quality is. If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value This oneThe of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink Interfparameter of DL Qualspecifies Threshold. downlink interference occurs. interference is existed. The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the quality is. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf UL level This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether theofuplink Threshold and quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value interference is the existed. Interf of UL the Qual Threshold. The uplink interference occurs.the value, the lower the The higher level, the greater the signal is. The greater

quality is. If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of UL Qual Threshold.this indicates the signal is good, but the quality is poor, that This parameter specifies whether is, the uplink interference occurs. the history record priority is considered in channel assignment. The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm. If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the history record priority is ineffective. Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record priority preferentially. This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel

assignment. If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective. Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel preferentially. assignment. If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not performed and the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel interference measurement is performed. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel with little interference is selected preferentially. This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel assignment. By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference.

In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure ratio reaches or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially; otherwise, the fullrate TCH is assigned preferentially. This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm, and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm. Yes: Open No: Close

This whether current cell supports the dynamic These transmission This parameter parameter specifies sets the priority ofthe different types in channel allocation. types diversity or dynamic PBT: include: 0: not supported Capacity with a higher priority 1: dynamic diversity supported Quality withtransmission a higher priority 2: dynamic PBT supported PS coordination with a relatively higher priority

PS coordination with an absolutely higher priority The priority of different types is as follows: Priority by capacity: capacity factors > quality factors > PS cooperation factors > management factors Priority by quality: quality factors the > capacity factors PShalf-rate cooperation > fullThis parameter specifies whether combination of > two TCHsfactors into one management factorsin a cell. rate TCH is allowed priority by PS to domain: factors > and PS cooperation factorsby > timeslot quality IfRelative this parameter is set No, thecapacity forced handover call delay caused factors > management factorsbut there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because arrangement can be avoided, Absolute priority by PS domain: PS cooperation factors > capacity factors > quality the timeslot arrangement is unavailable. factors > management This parameter specifies minimum time thethe recovery of a TCH from anfails SDCCH. If this parameter is set factors tothe Yes, calls may failfor when timeslot arrangement and The processing for not the select SDCCHthe recovered TCH is ascell. follows: each cell is configured when the MS does TCHF in to thethe concentric with a counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to ResTime. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + N1, the counter descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, the counter increases by 12 within the setting value; if the number of idle SDCCHs = 8 + N1, the counter remains unchanged. If the value of the counter is BSC equal to or lowerwhether than 0 after adjustment, the SDCCH is the converted When the determines to initiate the conversion from TCH to to thethe TCH. SDCCH, it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion exceeds the Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. If the than number of SDCCHs If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller or equal to the exceeds value of the thisvalue of this parameter, the BSC not initiate parameter, the BSC tries todoes find a TCHF thatthe canconversion. be converted to the SDCCH. This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH. Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows: 1.The cell allows the SDCCH dynamic adjustment. 2.(Number of idle TCHFs + number of idle TCHHs/2) ≥ 4 or the number of TRXs in the cell, and the cell must have at least one idle TCHF. 3.The sum of the numberthe of SDCCHs in the cell plus is smaller thanwhen the maximum This parameter specifies coding rate adopted oneight a half-rate channel a call is number of SDCCHs allowed in the cell. initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have

four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS Based onrespectively. the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate

adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this parameter has five bits. This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS Based onrespectively. the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and anmeasurement adjustment hysteresis between coding Based on the RQI in the call report, the BTS andthe MSneighboring automatically adjust rates. the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate

adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-tointerference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates. This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this parameter has eight bits. This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the assignment In normal assignment procedure, after receiving the assignment failure message from on the Um interface fails. the MS on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately.

Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um interface. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased. Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency band or of different frequency bands. If this parameter is set to Same Band, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is the same as what is used before the reassignment. If the parameter is set to Different Band, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is different from what is used before the reassignment. This whether to disable the sending of short You parameter can set thisspecifies parameter to improve the deterioration of point-to-point QoS caused by the messages. In carrier specificchannel cells, sending short messages on the downlink is interference, fault, orpoint-to-point engineering fault. disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls.

The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time to accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the response speed of the network. This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH function. This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an MS when the Abis resources are insufficient. When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the MS if the Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) or than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%).

This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can use different policies such as queuing, preemption, and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when network resources are occupied. If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest priority performs handover, and the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after handover. If the Allow EMLPP is set to No, a certain MS with lower priority releases the channel, the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after release. This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function. This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell is valid. The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter. After the valid measurement report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell. ... the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement Add 6: 36 dBand then sequence the TDD cells. report, 7: 0: ∞ 0 dB 1: 6 dB

... 7: 42 dB This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the best cell list or in the measurement report. A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell. 0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable) 1: -28 dB This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD 2: -24 dB cell is valid. ... If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of 15: dB this 28 parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell joins in the cell priority sequence. 0: 0 dB This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell. 1: 6 dB When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, it is recommended that the value of this ... parameter 6: 36 dB be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report. 0: 7: 0 ∞ dB 1: 6 parameter dB This specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a

DCS1800 cell is valid. ... If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the 7: 42 dB value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority sequence. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This ... parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell. When sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band, the value 6: 36 dB of 7: this ∞ parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. 0: 0 dB This specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a GSM900 1: 6 parameter dB cell ... is valid. When the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than 7: 42 dB the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority rank. 0: 0 dB 1: 6 dB This level offset a GSM900 cell. ... This parameter parameter specifies specifies the the signal level threshold forof cell reselection in connection mode. When the priority of aif GSM900 cell is sequenced on the of its band, the 6: connection 36 dB In mode, the signal level in the serving cellbasis is below [0,frequency 7] or above [8, 15], value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report. 7: ∞ the MS starts to search for 3G cells. 0: dB For0example: 6 dB If1:this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the ... starts to search for 3G cells. MS 7: 42 dB If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells. 0: -98 dBm 1: -94 dBm ... 6: -74 dBm 7: (always) 8: -78 dBm 9: -74 dBm ... 14: -54 dBm 15: ∞ (never)

This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the value of this parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the result into the RXLEV value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm to -37 dBm. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 0 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -110 dBm to -47 dBm. If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is Automatic, the MS chooses the least SCALE while ensuring that the MS can report the most strong level. This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with an invalid BSIC. This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet transfer mode. In packet transfer mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], MS starts to search for 3Gthe cells. This the parameter specifies whether MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the For BSICexample: must be decoded. If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells. If this parameter is set to 10 and if the signal level of the serving cell is higher than 10, the MS starts to search for 3G cells. This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection. 0: -98 dBm Only 1: -94when dBm the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the 3G cell can be one ... candidate cell for cell reselection. 0:-74 -20dBm dB 6: 1: dB 7: -6 (always) 2: 8: -18 -78 dB dBm 3: 9: -8 -74dB dBm 4: ... -16 dB 5: 14:-10 -54dB dBm 6: dB 15:-14 ∞ (never) 7: -12 dB. This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the Default dB.measurement report. best cellvalue: list or -20 in the

This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell. Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the serving cell, the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell. 0: -∞parameter (always select a cellthe if acceptable) This specifies level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode. 1: -28 dB In idle mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS 2: -24 to dBsearch for 3G cells. starts … example: For 15: 28parameter dB If this is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the MS starts to search for 3G cells. This parameter specifies threshold the signal cell reselection in than 10, If this parameter is set tothe 10 and if the of signal level oflevel the for serving cell is higher connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained. the MS starts to search for 3G cells. 0: -98 dBm 1: -94 dBm 2: -90 dBm 3: -86 dBm 4: -82system dBm information indicates "MBR", the MS reports the number of neighbor cells If the 5: -78 dBm frequency bands. on different 6: -74 the dBmMS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with the When 7：(always), is, the MS keeps searching for 3G cells serving cell, athat maximum of the value of Serving Band Reporting can be reported. 8: -78 dBm These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements: 9: -74 dBm 1. The receive levels of the neighbor cells must be higher than 900 Reporting Threshold 10: -70 dBm or 1800 Reporting Threshold. 11:The -66BSIC dBmof a neighbor cell must be valid. 2. 12: -62signals dBm of the neighbor cells must be the strongest among all the neighbor cells 3. The When Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an MS is the MS 13: -58Power dBm frequency on the same band. maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if 14: -54 dBm the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band not for receive the original power command after 15：∞(never), that is, the MS does notdoes search 3G cells random access. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08. The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.

This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands. It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter. The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a successful immediate assignment, the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as possible. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each band of multi-band MSs. In the an inter-band handover, power class be correctly This parameter specifies when MS disconnects a call if the MS must unsuccessfully described. When paging is made or the BA2 table is sent between different bands, decodes the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 andthe CM3 message must be known. For dual-band MSs, if ECSC is set to No, the MSC sends a 05.08. CLASSMARK REQUEST message after the MS MS, reports an EST IND Thethe MSinitial then Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the the counter S is message. enabled and reports UPDATE message. The connection time of the MS is affected. value is the set CLASSMARK to this parameter value.

Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved This parameter specifies allow emergency calls. For whose access class through power control or whether channel to handover, the connection is toMSs be re-established or is from 0 to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls are allowed. released. For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when the control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Callof Disable set to Yes. Thisaccess parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs specialisaccess classes to access the network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed. For example, 000001 indicates that classes except access class 10classes are allowed to This parameter specifies whether to users allow of theallMSs of common to access access the network. In the cell theload traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur the network. This parameter is where used for control. in busy1 hours. Forthat example, RACH burstValue occurs, the AGCH flow is overloaded, or Value indicates accessmore is not allowed. 0 indicates that access is allowed.For the Abis interface flow is overloaded.If this parameter is setexcept to 1 forclass the MSs some to example, 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes 0 areofallowed classes, thenetwork. traffic volume in this cell may be reduced. access the

During the BTS installation, activation, or cell maintenance test, this parameter can be set to 1. All MSs are not allowed to access the network, thus reducing the impact on installation or maintenance. This parameter thevolume maximum number of Channel Request messages thatFor can In the cell wherespecifies the traffic is heavy, congestion may occur in busy hours. be sent bymore an MS in anburst immediate example, RACH occurs,assignment the AGCH isprocedure. overloaded, or the Abis interface is After the MS initiates the immediate procedure, it alwaysthe listens tovolume the overloaded.If this parameter is set toassignment 1 for the MSs of some classes, traffic in messages on be thereduced. BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH this cell may group to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified interval. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate assignment message. When this number is reached, the immediate assignment message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded. Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message is dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or retransmitted.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment retransmission parameter to the BTS. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a fullrate channel). For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH is (5performed ms) parameter. Error control on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS

and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a halfrate channel). For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multiframe release. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame. For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3 services. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the SDCCH. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services. This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

This over This parameter parameter specifies specifies the the expiry expiry value value of of timer timer T200 T200 used used for for the the FACCH/TCHF SDCCH over the Um the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the interface. descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement retransmission mechanism. Each message must be confirmed by the peer end.In unknown cases, both ends are For the BTS3X in 03.0529 orAt later thethe double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter waiting if a message is lost. thisand time, deadlock of the system occurs.Therefore, specifies the end levelmust threshold for the random access of theexpires, MS. If the level the transmit establish a timer. When the timer thereceive transmit endof the RACH burst smaller than the value RACH Min.Access Level, the BTS regards thatisthe receive end does notofreceive the message and then the regards transmitthis end access as anthe invalid one and no decoding is performed. Ifisthe receive level of the RACH retransmits message.The number of retransmissions determined by N200.T200 burst is greater than the of RACH Min. Access Level,transmits the BTS considers and the N200 ensure thatvalue the data link layer sequentially data and that an the access request exists on this timeslot, and determines together with the value of transmission is free from errors. Random Access Error Threshold whether the RACH access is valid. Generally, RACH Busy Threshold is higher than RACH Min.Access Level. Therefore, for the RACH Min.Access Level is shielded. Fortraining the BTS2X (excluding the BTS24), the ThisBTS24, parameter specifies the correlation between sequences. RACH Min.Access Level parameter is invalid. According the GSM protocols, the system determines whether the received signal is the random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41 bits) and calculates the TA value.

This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control: TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled. Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden This specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. The value of this afterparameter the faulty TRX is restored. parameter has six bits. Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is The six bitsimmediately (from the most significant to is the least significant bit) indicate the performed after the faultybit TRX restored. following versions respectively: Allowed &speech Recover When Check Res: The TRX aiding is enabled and the switchback is half-rate version performed 3, half-rateafter version half-rate version 1, full-rate 3, full-rate not immediately the2, faulty TRX is restored. Instead,version the switchback is version 2, and full-rate version 1. Here, 2, and 1usually indicate2 AMR, EFR, and FR performed during the resource check inversions the early3,morning, o'clock. respectively. If a bit is 1, you can infer that the BSC supports the corresponding speech version. If a bit is 0, you can infer that the BSC does not support the corresponding speech version. For example, if the parameter is set to 001011, you can infer that full-rate versions 1-2 and half-rate version 1 are supported. In the HDLC networking if only full-rate version 1 among the threeAMR full-rate This parameter specifies mode, the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate calls. For versions is selected, it is recommended the AEC delay of all the DSPs in the DPUX details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH that period(480ms)). and DPUC be set to 141 so that the downlink traffic flow is further decreased.

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls. For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls. For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.

This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry. When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells. When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is For theifBTS3X series and this supports parameter specifies level started the following twodouble-transceiver conditions are met:BTSs, The cell directed try.the The load threshold the MS than random access the BTS the RACH busy state. of the cell for is greater or equal towhen Cell Direct Trydetermines Forbidden Threshold. When the receive level ofthe thetotal random access burst timeslot is greater thanand this the This parameter specifies number of paging times. The parameter threshold, theconfigured BTS considers that theside timeslot is busy. For thethe BTS3X series paging times on the MSC together determine number ofand the double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter onlytotal indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The retransmissions of the paging message. The paging times is approximately equal threshold setting does not affect thepaging normal access of the MS. to this parameter multiplied by the times configured on the MSC side. At present, For BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter specifies level threshold the the Paging Times is set to 4 in the MSC. The BSC does not support thethe mechanism for for the BTSthe to determine an MS random access.When receivemessage level of the random resending paging message; therefore, it processesthe a paging each time it access timeslotmessage. is greaterThe than this threshold anddouble-transceiver the access demodulation is receivesburst the paging BTS2X, BTS3X, and BTS support successful, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy and determines whether the paging retransmission. RACH access is valid based on the parameter Random Access Error Threshold. For the BTS2X, the parameter is used whether the timeslot This parameter is usedRACH by theBusy BTS Threshold to inform the BSC to of determine radio link connection failure. is busy. In BTS addition, the the parameter the normal access the MS. The MS access When the receives SACCH affects measurement report from of the MS, the counter for is allowed only when the levellink of the MS random burst greater than the RACH determining whether a radio is faulty is set toaccess the value ofisthis parameter. Each time Busy Threshold. the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the counter For the BTS24, this parameter has two functions. One function is indicating the level decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report, the threshold of the MS access for the system to determine the RACH busy state. counter increases byrandom 2. When of the random burst timeslot is greater this When the the receive value oflevel the counter is 0, theaccess radio link fails.The BTS sends athan connection threshold, the BTS considers the timeslot is busy. The other function is indicating failure indication message to that the BSC.The number of SACCH multi-frames and the radio whether the MS access is allowed.The MS access is allowed only when access level This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 link failure counter in the system message specify the radio link failure time on the and (including access and handover access) isjudgment greater than the threshold. 04.08. uplink andrandom that on the downlink respectively. The standard is retransmissions. whether the This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information The value of this parameter ranges from 0to to 63 MS, (corresponding to -110 dBm T3105.If to -47 When the BTS sends physical information the BTS starts the timer SACCH message is correctly decoded. Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. Ifthe the number of retransmissions exceeds dBm). the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the physical information to MS and restarts the timer The maximum for After BSC a connection failure message, which can alsoT3105. be a handover failure times message. resending physical information Ny1. receiving the message, the BSCisreleases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105. During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS. Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a Physical information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts. The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.

This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed parameters are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a 3G cell.

During a measurement period, a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB.

This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the original serving cell after a successful fast handover.

This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original serving cell after a successful fast handover.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. If the number of received measurement reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, no filtering is performed and no fast handover decision is made. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. This helps to avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. This helps to avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report. The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion, that is, the period during which the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. Such a period is within the value defined by this parameter.

The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. That is, if the triggering conditions of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. During a measurement period, if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.

During a measurement period, if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

During a measurement period, if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network, if the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold, a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful, no handover can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter.

This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the UL subcell by level. This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level. This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled.

If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload threshold, the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, theprevent calls in the cell arehandovers, handed over toparameter the OL subcell by be level. To ping-pong this should decided before the handover This the parameter specifies load handover for each level. from OL subcell to thethe UL period subcell.ofSuppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s)

and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition for a This parameter is aOL relative value, which specifies the size of SS(s) blank- zone the UL handover from the subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(n)between < Distance subcell the OL subcell. The OL greater the -value of this parameter is, the Boudaries larger the of betweenand Boundaries of UL And Subcells Distance Hysterisis Between blank zone is. UL And OL Subcells. For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL and UL subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of serving cell and that of the adjacent cell. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). When SS(s) = SS(n), the system considers that it is the boundary point of the UL subcell. When SS(s) - SS(n) > Distance between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells, it is the coverage area of the OL subcell. If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter, the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell load is not allowed.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold, the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general overload threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell general overload threshold, the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed. No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time. The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB. If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a 3G cell.

This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.

This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.

This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10. This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. It is used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level. This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter, some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell. When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. Otherwise, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed. After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail.

After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO to avoid ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the During the handover. handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are hierarchically UL subcell handled from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher receive level can be handed over to the OL subcell first. The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step Period. This parameter, together with Underlay HO Step Period, controls the level strip of the When multiple for thetoUL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously, calls handover from requests the UL subcell the OL subcell. In other words, the time taken in with This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the ULto determines UL lower level may be handed over first.from This does not conform the principle that the call subtracting Underlay HO Step Level the handover strip issubcell Underlay HO Step Period. subcell to OL subcell handover or the over OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced of the best quality should be handed preferentially. concentric cell.hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with Therefore, the When parameter is set Yes, to OL subcell. The value of this parameter is the higherthis RX level from the UL to subcell If thetaken call isininsubtracting the OL subcell and ifHO theStep OL to UL HO Allowed parameter sethandover to Yes, time Underlay Level from the signal level ofisthe the OL subcell to UL subcell handover is triggered when the traffic load in the UL subcell strip. is lower than En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold. If the call is in the UL subcell and the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is triggered, and if the UL to OL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, a timer is started when the traffic load in the UL subcell is greater than En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, thus handing over the of MSs the UL subcell the OL subcell. If the traffic load the UL This parameter is one theinparameters thattodetermine the coverage of the OL in subcell subcell is lowerof than En Iuo Outconcentric Cell General OverLoad Threshold, the related timer is and UL subcell an enhanced cell. stopped, and theConcentric MSs in theAllowed UL subcell are not handed OL subcell. If the Enhanced parameter is set to over Yes, to thethe coverage of the OL When this to No, thebytraffic in the UL Level subcell is not taken into subcell andparameter UL subcell is is set determined UtoOload HO Received Threshold, OtoU HO account triggering the UL subcell Threshold, to OL subcell theTA OLHysteresis. subcell to UL Receivedfor Level Threshold, RX_QUAL TA handover Threshold,orand subcell handover an enhanced concentric cell. to -47 dBm. The parameter level valuesis0in through map to -110 dBm This one of the63 parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to incoming-BSC -47 dBm. In a concentric cell, the channel assignment for an handover can be processed in one of the following modes: Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned. In a concentric cell,Aan intra-BSC incoming cell is handover request can be processed in Underlaid Subcell: channel in the UL subcell preferentially assigned. one of the following modes: No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to algorithms. the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then, the BSC compares the measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold, and determines the preferred service layer. During the comparison and determination, the BSC does not take the RX_LEV Hysteresis into consideration. Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned. Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned. IfNo TAPreference: Pref. of Imme-Assign is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel A channel Allowed is assigned according to general channel assignment request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL algorithms. subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.

This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the channel request message during an immediate assignment. If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. IfIfthe Assign Layer parameter toand System Optimization,in the current TA Pref. of Optimum Imme-Assign Allowed is setistoset Yes the access_delay the channel receive on the SDCCH canTA beThreshold estimatedof(by interpolating andafiltering) request level message is lower than Imme-Assign Pref., channelbased in the on OL the uplink measurementassigned value in during the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. aThen, subcell is preferentially the immediate assignment. Otherwise, the BSC in determines whether a TCH in the assigned. UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be channel the UL subcell is preferentially assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and AssignIf the Assign Optimum Layer to System Optimization, the current optimum-level Threshold, andparameter the result is ofset comparing the TA and TA Threshold of receive levelPref.. on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on Assignment the value the measurement onto the SDCCH. Then, Onlyuplink whenmeasurement the receive level on in the SDCCH is greaterreports than orsent equal Assign-optimumthe determines whether TCH than in theTA ULThreshold subcell orofinAssignment the OL subcell should levelBSC Threshold and the TA is alower Pref., a TCHbein the assigned on the result of comparing the uplink receive level OL subcellbased is preferentially assigned to the MS. Otherwise, a TCH inon thethe ULSDCCH subcelland is Assign-optimum-level the result of comparing the TA and TA Threshold preferentially assignedThreshold, to ensure and successful assignment. of Assignment Pref.. Only when the uplink receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal to AssignIn a concentric Threshold cell, the TCH in theTA following modes: optimum-level andcan thebe TAassigned is lower than Threshold of Assignment Pref., a System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports on the aSDCCH, TCH in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the MS. sent Otherwise, TCH in the the BSC UL determines which service layer should be preferentially selected. subcell is preferentially assigned to ensure successful assignment. Underlaid Subcell: The TCH63 in the are to preferentially The level values 0 through mapUL tosubcell -110 dBm -47 dBm. assigned to an MS. Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS. No preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment algorithms. According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold. #N/A One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_QUAL Threshold, HOparameters Received Level Threshold,the OtoU HO Received This parameter is oneUtoO of the that determine coverage of the Level OL subcell Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. and UL subcell. When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, andparameters TA Hysteresis. the Enhanced Concentric This parameter is one of the thatIfdetermine the coverage of Allowed the OL subcell parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid. and UL subcell. UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion When the Enhanced Concentric Allowedofparameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference Different Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Different Frequencies. Threshold, TAreceive Threshold, TA UL Hysteresis. If the Allowed Measure the leveland of the subcell and OLEnhanced subcell at Concentric several different places if parameter is set to OL Yes, this parameter is invalid. the UL subcell and subcell use different antennas. The recommended number of The RX_LEV Threshold parameter refers to the threshold of the downlink receive level. places is five. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The OL subcell and the UL subcell have different transmit power. Therefore, the receive level of the MS in the UL subcell is different from that in the OL subcell. This parameter specifies the power that should be compensated for the OL subcell. The value of this parameter should be the sum of these items: UO Amplifier Power Difference, Combiner Insertion Loss Difference, Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas, and Pass Loss Difference of Different Frequencies. Thisparameter value is measured the site.the Multiple-point measurements shouldfor be the performed This specifiesat whether TA is used as a decisive condition when different antennas are used for the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced concentric cell handover. Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid. In other words, the power of the OL subcell is not compensated.

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is enabled.

This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.

This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH, the downlink receive quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO. This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking. To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after HO. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei II power control algorithm, thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the new channel after handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding call drops caused by too low a uplink receive level. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm). This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent cells must be located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer. If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where the MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. Only when the MS is located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer, penalty is performed. This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO. The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter are regarded as consecutive handovers.

When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed, a timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover. Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires. This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers allowed. If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. If multiple consecutive intra-cell handovers occur, the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period.

The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). The threshold equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Otherwise, the MS is regarded as moving slow. According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level for every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. The handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell. When the load of the is equal to or greater than thethat LoadofHO all the calls The value of Load HOcell Step Level must be smaller than theThreshold, Load HO Bandwidth. served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, and the load on the CPU will increase rapidly as a consequence. In some cases, call drops may occur due to traffic congestion in the cell. Therefore, the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels. Thissetting parameter specifies the period for each level. The of this parameter is dependent onload the handover Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold parameter. Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth), a load handover is allowed.

If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can receive the MSs System to the the system flux obtained based on message handed flux overthresholds from othercorrespond cells. Otherwise, cell rejects the MSs handed over from packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux control other cells. level of the system. 0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to 85. indicates the highest level. The traffic load ofisaallowed cell refers towhen the TCH the cell. A load handover only the seizure system rate flux in is lower than the value of this The load handover is triggered whenover the traffic load in athreshold cell is greater parameter. The handover performed the maximum may than have the value of this parameter. In other words, the load handover is triggered when ratio tremendous impacts on the system. Thus, this parameter should notthe be set toofa TCHs higher occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined for load value. 1) The flow handover. control level algorithm for the assigned system messages: [(Average Message Usage - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold)/(Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold) x 100]/10+1 (round-down for division operation). If the value is smaller than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, Level 0 is used. If the value is equal to or greater than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, the level is calculated. The value range is from 0 to 11. 2) Flow control threshold for corresponds the CPU to start to discard quality the channel messages The value of this parameter to multiplying level access 0 to 7 by 10. An and paging handover messages:can 80% emergency be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is . Flow control threshold theparameter. CPU to discard all channel access messages and paging greater than the value offor this messages: 100% . CPU usage smaller than 80% corresponds to level 0. CPU usage equal to or greater than CPU flow control threshold 80% corresponds to level 2. An increase of 5% means The value ofof this parameter to multiplying 0 to an increase 2 levels. Levelcorresponds 10 is the highest. The levelquality value level can be 0, 7 2,by 4, 10. 6, 8,An and emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS 10. is greater than the value of this parameter.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is greater than the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold. For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value. When n = 1, that is, when the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal If level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or tothe 30,receive this parameter is invalid. downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 56 to 58, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 53 to 55, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 49 to 52, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 46 to 48, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 42 to 45, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 39 to 41, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 36 to 38, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 32 to 35, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists. The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is allowed. If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink measurement report emergency handover is triggered. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially selected. An intra-cell is triggered if no candidate is available This parameter is usedhandover, to controlhowever, the no downlink measurement reportcell handover and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. algorithm.

If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not allowed in this cell. If this parameter set for to 1, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm This parameter is is used configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. is enabled. Therefore, handover decision related nothe downlink measurement report is Together with filter parameter B, it is one of thetofor nine filter parameters. This parameter is used for configuring the filter rapidly dropped The receive level. allowed in this formula cell. corresponding as follows (indrop the trend program, thereceive value of A1 within to A8 can be This parameter indicateisspecifies the of the level a period. obtained by subtracting the configured and Bdrop is the value of the If this parameter is set to10 a from higher value, a morevalue, rapid level is negative required for configured triggering avalue): rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter C1(nt) = A1 A1 x C(nt) + A2 C(nt-t) + A3the x C(nt-2t) A8 x C(nt-7t). C(nt) is the Parameters to This parameter is A8. used forx configuring filter for+…+ the rapidly droppedWhere, receive level. uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is For details, refer to Filter Parameters A1-A8. Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The smaller than B,formula and if C(nt) below (in thethe Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., corresponding is asisfollows program, the value of then A1 tothe A8 signal can belevel is considered be rapid dropping. obtained byto subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the Filter parameters configured value):A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8 correspond to a1 to + a8A2 in xthe program, and ai = Ai-10 (i A8 = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) C(nt-t) + A3the x C(nt-2t) +…+ x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is to the Thisinparameter is used for configuring filter for theor rapidly dropped receive level. a8 the program, there must be values smaller than equal to 0. uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The For example, if the level drops in aRX_LEV granularity period, you need tolevel set A3 smaller than B, andreceive if C(nt) below therapidly Edge HO Thrsh., then the corresponding formula is A2 asisto follows the program, value A1+toa2 A8xsignal can be = is to A8 to 10,to A1be torapid 0, and 20. In(in this case, C1(nt)the = a1 x Cof (nt) C(nt-t) considered dropping. obtained by subtracting 10 from the level configured value, andyou B is the negative value a of the 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To to trigger a rapid drop set C1(nt) Filter parameters A1 A8 may be smaller thanhandover, or equal to 10.should Parameters A1 totoA8 configured value): value smaller than B. and then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula correspond a1 to + a8A2 in xthe program, and ai = Ai-10 (i A8 = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 C1(nt) =the A1 to x C(nt) C(nt-t) + A3in x an C(nt-2t) +…+ x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is to the reflects rapid of the cell MR.for This is drop used for configuring the filter theor rapidly dropped receive level. a8 inparameter the program, there must belevel values smaller than equal to 0. uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the extent to which Together withiffilter parameter B,drops it is one of the filter parameters. Theneed to set A3 For example, the receive level rapidly in nine aRX_LEV granularity period, you smaller than B,formula and if C(nt) isfollows below the Edge HO Thrsh., then the is the level drops. However, the ofthe this parameter complicated. corresponding is A2 as program, value A1+toa2 A8xsignal can belevel to A8 to 10, A1be to 0, and tosetting 20. In(in this case, C1(nt)the =isa1 x Cof (nt) C(nt-t) = considered to rapid dropping. obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To to trigger a rapid level drop you set C1(nt) a Filter parameters A1 A8 may be smaller thanhandover, or equal to 10.should Parameters A1 totoA8 configured value): value smaller than B.a8and then the fast and levelaidrop appears in a MR period. The formula correspond to a1 to in the program, = Ai-10 (i = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 C1(nt) =the A1 rapid x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3in x an C(nt-2t) +…+ A8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is to the reflects of the cell MR.for This is drop used for configuring the filter theor rapidly dropped receive level. a8 inparameter the program, there must belevel values smaller than equal to 0. uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the extent to which Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in aRX_LEV granularity period, you need tolevel set A3 smaller than B, and if C(nt) isfollows below the Edge HO Thrsh., then the the level drops. However, the ofthe this parameter complicated. corresponding formula is A2 as program, value A1+toa2 A8xsignal can be = is to A8 to 10, A1be to 0, and tosetting 20. In(in this case, C1(nt)the =isa1 x Cof (nt) C(nt-t) considered to rapid dropping. obtained by subtracting 10 from the level configured value, andyou B is the negative value a of the 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To to trigger a rapid drop set C1(nt) Filter parameters A1 A8 may be smaller thanhandover, or equal to 10.should Parameters A1 totoA8 configured value): value smaller than B. and then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula correspond a1 to + a8A2 in xthe program, and ai = Ai-10 (i A8 = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 C1(nt) =the A1 to x C(nt) C(nt-t) + A3in x an C(nt-2t) +…+ x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is to the reflects rapid of the cell MR.for This is drop used for configuring the filter theor rapidly dropped receive level. a8 inparameter the program, there must belevel values smaller than equal to 0. uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the extent to which Together withiffilter parameter B,drops it is one of the filter parameters. Theneed to set A3 For example, the receive level rapidly in nine aRX_LEV granularity period, you smaller than B,formula and if C(nt) isfollows below the Edge HO Thrsh., then the is theA8 level drops. However, the ofthe this parameter complicated. corresponding is A2 as program, value A1+toa2 A8xsignal can belevel to to 10, A1be to 0, and tosetting 20. In(in this case, C1(nt)the =isa1 x Cof (nt) C(nt-t) = considered to rapid dropping. obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To to trigger a rapid level drop you set C1(nt) a Filter parameters A1 A8 may be smaller thanhandover, or equal to 10.should Parameters A1 totoA8 configured value): value smaller than B.a8and then the fast and levelaidrop appears in a MR period. The formula correspond to a1 to in the program, = Ai-10 (i = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 C1(nt) =the A1 rapid x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3in x an C(nt-2t) +…+ A8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is to the reflects of the cell MR.for Thisinparameter is drop used for configuring the filter theor rapidly dropped receive level. a8 the program, there must belevel values smaller than equal to 0. uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the extent to which Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in aRX_LEV granularity period, you need tolevel set A3 smaller than B, and if C(nt) isfollows below the Edge HO Thrsh., then the the level drops. However, the ofthe this parameter complicated. corresponding formula is A2 as program, value A1+toa2 A8xsignal can be = is to A8 to 10, A1be to 0, and tosetting 20. In(in this case, C1(nt)the =isa1 x Cof (nt) C(nt-t) considered to rapid dropping. obtained by subtracting 10 from the level configured value, andyou B is the negative value a of the 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To to trigger a rapid drop set C1(nt) Filter parameters A1 A8 may be smaller thanhandover, or equal to 10.should Parameters A1 totoA8 configured value): value smaller than B.a8and then the fast and levelaidrop appears in a MR period. The formula correspond to a1 to in the program, = Ai-10 (i = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 C1(nt) =the A1 rapid x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3in x an C(nt-2t) +…+ A8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is to the reflects of the cell level MR.for This parameter is drop used for configuring the filter theor rapidly dropped receive level. a8 in the program, there must be values smaller than equal to 0. uplink RX_Level of the the serving cell in the MR received at the time ofthe nt.extent If C1(nt) is You can configure filter to define the number of MRs used and to which Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in aRX_LEV granularity period, you need tolevel set A3 smaller than B, and if C(nt) isfollows below the Edge HO Thrsh., then the theA8 level drops. However, the ofthe this parameter complicated. corresponding formula is A2 as program, value A1+toa2 A8xsignal can be = is to to 10, A1be to 0, and tosetting 20. In(in this case, C1(nt)the =isa1 x Cof (nt) C(nt-t) considered to rapid dropping. obtained by subtracting 10 from the level configured value, andyou B is the negative value a of the 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To to trigger a rapid drop set C1(nt) Filter parameters A1 A8 may be smaller thanhandover, or equal to 10.should Parameters A1 totoA8 configured value): value smaller than B. and then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula correspond a1 to + a8A2 in xthe program, and ai = Ai-10 = 1-8). Therefore, among C1(nt) =the A1 to x C(nt) C(nt-t) + A3in x an C(nt-2t) +…+(i A8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt)a1 is to the reflects rapid drop of must the cell MR. than a8 in the program, there belevel values smaller or the equal to 0. uplink RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at time of nt. If C1(nt) is You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the extent to which For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in aRX_LEV granularity period, set A3 smaller than B, and if C(nt)the is below the Edgeparameter HO Thrsh., then you the need signaltolevel is the level drops. However, of this complicated. to A8 to 10, A1be to 0, and A2 tosetting 20. In this case, C1(nt) =isa1 x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = considered to rapid dropping. 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To to trigger a rapid level drop you set C1(nt) a Filter parameters A1 A8 may be smaller thanhandover, or equal to 10.should Parameters A1 totoA8 value smaller then the fast and levelaidrop appears in a MR period. The formula correspond to than a1 toB.a8and in the program, = Ai-10 (i = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 to reflects rapid drop of must the cell in smaller an MR. than or equal to 0. a8 in thethe program, there belevel values You can configure the filter touplink define the number MRs used and theyou extent to to which This parameter specifies the quality threshold of an emergency handover. An For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in aofgranularity period, need set A3 theA8 level drops. However, the setting of this parameter complicated. emergency handover dueA2 toto bad iscase, triggered the quality to to 10, A1 to 0, and 20.quality In this C1(nt)when =isa1 x Cuplink (nt) + receive a2 x C(nt-t) = is greater than or equal to the UL Qual.level Threshold. 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt). To trigger a rapid drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a When an emergency is triggered, inter-cell handover value smaller than B. handover and then the fast levelan drop appears in a MR should period. be The formula preferentially selected. Anthe intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell reflects the rapid drop of cell level in an MR. is available and if intra-cell arenumber allowed. You can configure the filter handovers to define the of MRs used and the extent to which the level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is complicated.

This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold. When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell handovers are allowed. An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter.

This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be selected.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to data configuration.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to the Um interface error.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover failure due to cell congestion.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK. By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR) handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch. The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHFH HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the TCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate. When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the SDCCH REP_QUANT. By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH. By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate. This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and the original serving cell is not allowed. This handover parametertospecifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original serving cell to avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance. This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO. After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed. The parameter penalty level values the 0 through 63ofmap -110 dBm to -47 This specifies duration the to penalty imposed ondBm. the original cell where

an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell serving cell is not allowed. where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty Time after BQ HO. After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive level of the serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the serving cell is not allowed. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time. The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the timing advance. The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter to average the TA value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover decision. This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the channel quality on the SDCCH.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal strength on the SDCCH.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the speech/data TCH signal strength.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during interpolation. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of this parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed according to two consecutive MRs that are lost. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter, all lost MRs are discarded, and calculations are made again when new MRs are Thisreceived. parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If the receive

level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter, the adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to the BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC. For example, if this parameter is set to Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed MRs to the BSC every 0.5 second.

This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the BTS to the BSC.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report to the BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and the original MR to the BSC. This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This parameter determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. This parameter is set to NO if power control is performed by the BSC. This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality. This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad. If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty is performed on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell. When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are likely to occur. If a handover fails, a penalty should be performed on the serving cell. These kinds of penalties can be performed on cells in one BSC or on external cells. This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover. After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS can be handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval. When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency handover timer is started. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the timer expires. This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. No handover is allowed during the minimum interval. A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only after the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers. After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period specified by this parameter.

After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period specified by this parameter.

This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The ATCB handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. It can decrease the interference, improve the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. 0: Close 1: Open This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.

This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.

This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled. 0: NO; 1: YES This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover. When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover. When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time. The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO the H2F HO This parameter determines the period during which the Threshold triggering or conditions of the Threshold. This parameter is used with the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are two met.parameters. The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO Threshold. This parameter is used with the two parameters. This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This parameter does not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover. The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an adjacent cell. Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset) TheM Mcriterion criterionsupports is met if the uplink of the adjacent >= (Minimum The the Filtered minimum valuelevel constraint of uplink cell receive level of the uplink power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset); adjacent cell. otherwise, the Mlevel criterion is adjacent not met. cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Expected uplink of the Access Level Offset) The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset); otherwise, the M criterion is not met. This specifies the ranges hysteresis of0an or inter-priority This The parameter value of this parameter from tointer-layer 63 (corresponding to -110handover. dBm to -47 parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers. dBm). Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold Inter-layer HO Hysteresis Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold + Inter-layer HO Hysteresis of an adjacent cell - 64. This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate cells for handovers. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell. When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent cell is triggered. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover is triggered. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge triggered. If the handover DL receiveislevel remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a This parameter P of the P/N criterion. period, the edgecorresponds handover isto triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant

edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and If the UL receive level remains lower than the HObalance. UL RX_LEV Threshold for a the actual network performance to achieve theEdge UL/DL period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover can be decreased. the PBGT handover not dBm enabled and The value of thisthreshold parameter ranges from 0 toIf63 (corresponding tois -110 to -47 the edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel dBm). interference, and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based on the handover performance statistics and the actual network performance to achieve the UL/DL balance. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled. dBm). When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality is lower than the interference handover quality threshold, the interference handover is triggered. In other words, the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over. This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. The concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell. The concentric cell handover can improve system capacity and conversation quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The TA handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA threshold. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The longer the distance is, the greater the TA value is. This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. Whether a BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER). When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold. a BQ emergency handover is performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal level or channel interference. This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS makes a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the receive level is too low. To avoid such a call drop, an edge handover can be performed. When the UL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is handed over to a neighbor cell. This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. Cells are set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical handover. Then, based on the layers and priorities, calls are handed over to the cells with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority). This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs. This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. When this function is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS. This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to This parameter a traffic load-sharingcell handover is enabled. reduce the CPU specifies load. Thewhether fast-moving micro-to-macro handover algorithm is used The handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel only load in special conditions. assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in the cells of the same layer. The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted. This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced intra-cell handover is not subject to this parameter.

This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. After the sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority.

The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs. This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408. This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.

This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS where cell reselection parameters can be obtained. If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. If this parameter is setspecifies to 1, thethe MSmanual should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 This parameter correction of C2. from other bytes of the system information type 7 orof 8 message. If this parameter is properly configured, the number handovers can be reduced and a better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for an MS to access the cell when CRO increases. This parameter Cell should Bar Qualify (CBQ) valid for cell selection.large It is invalid for bring cell Generally, the CRO be less thanis25 dB only because excessively CRO may reselection. uncertainties to the network.In addition, the same CRO applies to the cells with the 1: barred same priority.For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08. 0: allowed This parameter affects only GSM Phase II MSs or GSM PhaseII+ MSs. Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority Cell Reselect0 Parameters Indication (PI for short), 0 Normal Normalsent on the broadcast channel, indicates whether CRO, Barred TO, and PT are used. 0 1 Barred Actually, the0MS is informed cell reselection is performed. For details, 1 Low whether C2-based Normal see 0508.In addition, Normal a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based 1 GSM Rec. 1 0408 andLow cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection. When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2 equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1. This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between

different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update. reselection hysteresis. In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period This parameter specifies the numberisofimproved. multi-frames in the a cycle on thetraffic paging decreases, the service performance When signaling of channel, the that is, the number the of paging on a drops.In specific paging channel. network increases, usage sub-channels of radio resources addition, when the location In actualperiod situation, an MS monitors only the associatedincreases, paging sub-channel. For details, update decreases, the MS power consumption and the average see GSMtime Rec. is 05.02 andshortened.When 05.08. standby greatly setting this parameter, take into consideration If the value of this parameter increases, number of on paging in a cell the processing capability of the MSC and the BSC, the load the Asub-channels interface, Abis increases, thusinterface, reducingHLR, the number ofGenerally, MSs served by each paging sub-channel and interface, Um and VLR. a larger value is adopted in continuous prolonging average time of value the MS details about the calculation coverage inthe urban areasservice and a smaller inbattery. suburbs,For rural areas, or blind spots. of the paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases. This the timeslots between consecutive Thisparameter parameterspecifies should be setnumber on the of basis that the paging the channel is not overloaded. In transmissions of channel messages by as an small MS. as possible. The load of the addition, the value of the request parameter should be To reduce the collisions the RACH and to improve efficiency of the RACH, antheof paging channels should on be periodically on reserved the running The value This parameter specifies the number of measured CCCH blocks for network. the AGCH. After access is defined in GSM on Rec. The algorithm specifies three this parameter should beparameter adjusted the04.08. basis of the load. CCCH isalgorithm configured, this actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and parameters: Tx-integer (Tbe forsent short), maximum number of cells retransmissions (RET),the and S A paging message must simultaneously in all the in an LAC. Thus, PCH. related to channel combination. capacity of the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance. Thismust parameter configuration the cells CCCHoftoan determine the parameter S. cell, be theworks same with as orthe similar to that in of other LAC. This relations parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSsofinthe a cell. This parameter is The between this parameter and the configuration CCCH are as follows: an information element 2 and and 6 messages. When this parameter is (IE) set in to the 3, 8,system 14, or information 50, S is 55 iftype the CCCH SDCCH do not If a bitainphysical the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding share channel. measurement report toisthe value of(CBA). this has a byte (eightshare bits).a When this parameter set to 3, The 8, 14, or 50, S is parameter 41 if the CCCH and SDCCH This parameter specifies theBTS. cell bar access Each maps with an cell NCCaccess (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit physical channel. Valuebit 0 indicates that is allowed. NWhen is 0, the MS doesthat notiscell measure cell level of ifNCC this parameter setaccess to 4, the 9,isor 6, allowed. S is 76 the N. CCCH and SDCCH do not share a Value 1 indicates not physical channel. Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For When this is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 52 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical details, seeparameter GSM Rec. 04.08. channel. Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority isNormal set to 5, 10, or 20, SNormal is 109 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not 0When this parameter 0 share a physical channel. 0 1 Barred Barred isLow set to 5, 10, or 20,Normal S is 58 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a 1When this parameter 0 physical channel. 1 1 Low Normal When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 163 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a physical channel. When this parameter is set to 6, 11, or 25, S is 86 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical channel. This parameter specifies whether to enable Attach-detach allowed (ATT) do function. When this parameter is set to 7, 12, or 32, Sthe is 217 if the CCCH and SDCCH not For different cellschannel. in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same. share a physical IfWhen this parameter is setistoset Yes, after the MS is a this parameter to network 7, 12, orconnection 32, S is 115isifnot theprovided CCCH and SDCCH share powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources. physical channel. The timeslot for sending messages is a random value from the collection of {0, 1…, MAX(T, If the TC8)-1}. resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to keep the The duration number of (excluding the timeslot useddata to send messages) between test fortimeslots continuously transmitting the uplink of the old channel. If TDMtwo adjacent channel request messages is a random value from collection ofIP{S, S+1, transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is the set to 10 ms; if …, S+T-1}. is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 20 ms. transmission When T increases, the interval between two adjacent channel requests increases, and RACH conflicts decrease. When S increases, the interval between two adjacent channel request messages increases, and RACH conflicts decrease, thus improving the usage of AGCH and SDCCH. The access time of the MS, however, is prolonged and the network performance is decreased when T and S increase. Under normal conditions, an appropriate T value should be used to ensure that S is as low as possible, and ensure that AGCH and SDCCH are not overloaded.

When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel. When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel. In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. The timer stops after the BSC receives the HANDOVER COMPLETE message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS. After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another attempt to access the network after the timer expires. For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the ERROR INDICATION, CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and RELEASE INDICATION messages are received, and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call is. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops. The BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires. This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections. The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires. The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC handover fails.

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.

After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC handover failure message. In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the BSC receives a Handover Complete message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message. The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC receives the CC message before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the timer expires, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH channel.

This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure. The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.

Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable.

Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable.

This specifies Qtru parameter Signal Merge Switchwhether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping supports intelligent consumption decrease. The QTRUthe signal merge power algorithm is to prevent the calls with great difference between

uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot. The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal strength of this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover is initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the calls should be handed over to another timeslot. P specifies the Observed timemaximum of uplink received level difference, andthat N specifies This parameter specifies the number of paging messages a cell is the Durationtoofsend uplink received level difference. allowed within a statistical period.

This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to send within a statistical period.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on.

This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets, which is an integral multiple of 50 ms.

The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the paging message packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are packaged according to cells; otherwise, the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU.

This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use, that is, whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics algorithm II, when the frequency scanning function is enabled. This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the cell is out of service. When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service. When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out of service. This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be preempted.

This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services.

This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message.

This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel through assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes, the assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers. Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies. The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell. This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result. Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main and diversity levels during the scanning of main and diversity antennas 0 specifies optimization. Maximum/Mean: maximum and mean values of the uplink receive level 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-cell handover timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by incoming-BSC handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization.

1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by resource check are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no MRs for a long time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced handover failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by equipment fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis territorial link fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained in the statistics of call drops.

0 specifies optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message is sent by the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call reestablishment times out, the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the statistics of call drops. 0When specifies optimization. the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 1 specifiesin nothe optimization. contained statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the reasons except for the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM intervention, and radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are 0 specifiesin optimization. contained the statistics of call drops. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio resource unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM intervention are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio link failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization.

1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by sequence error are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by unsolicited DM response are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are contained the statistics of call drops. 0 specifiesin optimization. 1 specifies no optimization. When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200 timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops. When the call drop counters are not call drops by this reason This parameter specifies whether theoptimized, repeater isthe configured in caused a cell. The function of are contained the statistics of call drops. repeater isinsimpler than that of BTS, and the repeater is an extended equipment that is

used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. Not only the repeater can improve the base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic volume of network. The setting of this parameter affects the handover. Because the distance between repeaters is long, the handover between repeaters can only be asynchronous. This parameter specifies the Otherwise, the handover maydelay fail. of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is initialized. The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding detection starts immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might be made. In such a case, this parameter is used to specify a delay. This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface. The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is congested, some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by Abis flow. By default, flow control on the Abis interface is performed. This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is one of the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message.

This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is one of the cell re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message. This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.05. In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19, mapping to the following: {43,41,39,37,35,33,31,29,27,25,23,21,19,17,15,13,11,9,7,5} respectively. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 5 (mapping to 33 dBm). The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is level 19 (mapping to 5 dBm). Other transmit power levels are reserved for high-power MSs. In a GSM1800 or GSM1900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 31, mapping to the following: This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and {30,28,26,24,22,20,18,16,14,12,10,8,6,4,2,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,36,34,32} 6 messages. Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 0 respectively. If this parameter is setThe to Yes, the receive level of thesupported MS equalsby the (mapping to 30 dBm). minimum transmit power anmeasured MS is levelreceive 15 level in FHto minus the Other receive level obtained from the on the BCCH TRX. (mapping 0 dBm). transmit power levels are timeslots reserved for high-power MSs. This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request is sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the requested bandwidth by the ActGene. The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. When the resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times. The effect of the ActGene is from 0.5 to 1.

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.

This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction.

This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna Azimuth Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell. Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included Angle/2 This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement. The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58. This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication message to the BSC. The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, and AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58. This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot, that is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages (such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58. If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The interval for sending the CCCH This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages. overload message is CCCH Load Indication Period(s). This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot.For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The CCCH overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH overload messages.

This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication messages, informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. In the radio resource indication message, the TRX reports the interference level of each idle channel in the measurement period. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 08.08. The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates whether the parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER threshold. The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter. This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS, and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error.If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller. This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error. For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not installed. The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3 greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed. This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to synchronize the MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized. The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH signals of adjacent cells do appear in the same frameby to which facilitate This parameter specifies thenot maximum number of levels the the BTSMS RFdecoding. power

decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power control and static power control. For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, this parameter is invalid. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, power control is performed on the basis of This parameter the power level specifies of a TRX. the period during which interference levels are averaged. This parameter specifies threshold used for interference Before the BTS sends thethe radio resource indication message measurement. to the BSC, the interference The BSS the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied are by MSs, calculates levels onmeasures the idle channels in the period specified by this parameter averaged. The and reports the level on eachlevels of theonidle This helps the BSC to result is used to interference classify the interference thechannels. idle channels into five assign channels. interference bands. According theGSM strength of interference signals, For details,tosee Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.the interference signals are classified into interference levels. values of these are called Interf. Band Thresholds. This six parameter specifies theThe threshold used for levels interference measurement. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. BTS, then, The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied byThe MSs, calculates sends a radio resource indication tothe theidle BSC. The BSC This compares the BSC busytoand and reports the interference level message on each of channels. helps the idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication assign channels. message to determine whether to performsignals, a handover. The interference band According to the strength of interference the interference signals are classified measurement result levels. provides reference threshold andInterf. interference analysis. into six interference The values offor these levels setting are called Band Thresholds. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. The BTS determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, If the difference between the values of two to thresholds small, the interference is sends a radio resource indication message the BSC. are Thetoo BSC compares the busy and too the difference the values twointhresholds are too great, the idle obvious. channelsIfreported in the between measurement reportofand the radio resource indication interference is not reflected. message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference is not reflected.

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign channels. According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into interference levels. values of these are called Interf. Band Thresholds. This six parameter specifies theThe threshold used for levels interference measurement. The BSS BTS determines theuplink interference level on these thresholds. BTS, then, The measures the quality of thebased radio channels occupied byThe MSs, calculates sends a radio resource indication tothe theidle BSC. The BSC This compares the BSC busytoand and reports the interference level message on each of channels. helps the idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication assign channels. message whether to performsignals, a handover. The interference band Accordingtotodetermine the strength of interference the interference signals are classified measurement result levels. provides reference for threshold setting andInterf. interference analysis. into six interference The values of these levels are called Band This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. Thresholds. For details, see GSM Rec.interference 08.08, 08.58, andbased 12.21. The BTS determines the level on these thresholds. The BTS, then, The measures the uplink qualityof oftwo the thresholds radio channels occupied by calculates If theBSS difference between the values are small, theMSs, interference is sends a radio resource indication message tothe theidle BSC. Thetoo BSC compares the BSC busytoand and reports the interference level on each of channels. This helps the too obvious. Ifreported the difference between the values ofand twointhresholds are too great, the idle channels in the measurement report the radio resource indication assign channels. interference is not reflected. message whether to performsignals, a handover. The interference band Accordingtotodetermine the strength of interference the interference signals are classified measurement result levels. provides reference for threshold setting andInterf. interference analysis. into six interference The values of these levels are called Band Thresholds. This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement. For details, see GSM the Rec.interference 08.08, 08.58, andbased 12.21. The BTS determines level on these thresholds. The BTS, then, The measures the uplink qualityof oftwo the thresholds radio channels occupied by calculates If theBSS difference between the values are too small, theMSs, interference is sends a radio resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and obvious. reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. Thisare helps BSCthe toand too Ifreported the difference between the values ofand two thresholds toothe great, idle channels in the measurement report in the radio resource indication assign channels. interference is not reflected. message whether to performsignals, a handover. The interference band Accordingtotodetermine the strength of interference the interference signals are classified measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. into six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. For see GSM the Rec.interference 08.08, 08.58, andbased 12.21. The details, BTS determines level on these thresholds. The BTS, then, If the difference betweenindication the valuesmessage of two thresholds are tooBSC small, the interference reports a radio resource to the BSC. The compares the busy is too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, and idle channels reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource the interference is not reflected. indication message to determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band

measurement result provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, seeCell GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, 12.21. If Assignment Load Judge Enable is and set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started If the following differencetwo between the values of two arethe toodirected small, the is if the conditions are met: The thresholds cell supports tryinterference procedure. The too obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the load of the cell is greater than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold. This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. To reduce the power consumption, interference is not reflected. the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. The MS that supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are interested in. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery. This specifiesthe theDRX data service supported. The parameter BSC that supports should send the dispatching message to MSs so that This value of use the the parameter can be The set as required. the MSs can DRX function. period occupied by broadcast short messages 0000000001: indicates that only themessage NT14.5Kisdata service is supported. that are contained in a dispatching called a dispatching period. The 0000000010: indicates only the NT12K data service are is supported. description and positionthat of the broadcast short message contained in the 0000000100: indicates only the sequence. NT6K data service is supported. dispatching message inthat the sending 0000001000: indicates that only the T14.4K data service is supported. 0000010000: indicates that only the T9.6K data service is supported. 0000100000: indicates that only the T4.8K data service is supported. 0001000000: indicates that only the data service is supported. If this parameter is set to StartUp, theT2.4K BTS transmit power is adjusted to the maximum 0010000000: only the T1.2K data service is addition, supported. before the BSCindicates sends a that handover command to the MS. In the BTS transmit 0100000000: indicatesduring that only the T600BITS data service is supported. power is not adjusted the handover to ensure the success of the handover. 1000000000: indicates that only the T1200/75 data service is supported. When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the BSC cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive the handover command, thus leading to the call drop. This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). If this parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC measures the traffic on a per VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is low, the speech quality is good. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and thus the speech quality is monitored.

This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.

This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 7. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 6. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.

This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 5. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 4. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 3. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 2. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain. This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC increases the uplink transmit power.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC decreases the uplink transmit power.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink receive level.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC increases the downlink power.

This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC decreases the downlink transmit power.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink power control.

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink power control.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive quality.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink receive level.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential filtering formula.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in a power control period.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH in a power control period.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control commands.

When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this parameter, the power control stops.

This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS. 0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB)

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL In downlink power control,the if the downlink receive Upper qualityThreshold is greatercontains than or equal to this Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, value of DL RX_LEV the value of threshold, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% In uplink power control, if 6.4% the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual. Level 6: BER ranges from to 12.8% Bad Trig Threshold, then UL RX_LEV Threshold contain Qual. Level 7: BER greatercontrol, thanthe 12.8% In the uplink power ifactual the uplink receiveUpper quality is greatershould than or equal UL to this Bad UpLEVDiff. threshold, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% This specifies maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the Levelparameter 7: BER greater thanthe 12.8% receive quality.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality. This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level. In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible down adjustment step. When the downward power is performed based on step the level, the maximum This parameter specifies theadjustment AMR maximum down adjustment permitted by the permissible differs based onless the than receive quality. quality zonedown 1 (theadjustment RQ value isstep greater than 0 and 3) based on the signal level. This parameter the maximum step decreasing theinto signal level in (0, In the Huawei II specifies power control algorithm, thelength qualityinzone is divided three grades power when thereceive RQ is 2.quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum 1-2, ≥ control 3) based on the permissible down adjustment step. When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on in thedecreasing receive quality. This parameter specifies the maximum step length the signal level in This parameter specifies theismaximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power control when the RQ 0. power control when thecontrol RQ is is 1. When power control step calculatedthe based on the signal quality, the upper In the the Huawei II power algorithm, quality zone is divided into three grades (0, threshold and the threshold of the stable state quality zone set. When the 1-2, ≥ 3) based onlower the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone hasare different maximum signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power permissible down adjustment step. control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of thethe downlink When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, maximum quality for power permissible down control. adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. The mapping between the BER the quality level is assignal follows: When the power control step is and calculated based on the quality, the upper Level 0: BER than 0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality threshold andsmaller the lower threshold Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% power control. Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level Level 5: 0: BER BER ranges smaller from than 3.2% 0.2% to 6.4% Level Level 6: 1: BER BER ranges ranges from from 6.4% 0.2% to to 12.8% 0.4% Level than 0.4% 12.8% Level 7: 2: BER BER greater ranges from to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% upper and afrom lower threshold. Level threshold 5: BER ranges 3.2% to 6.4%Power control is not performed if the signal level isLevel between theranges upperfrom threshold the lower threshold. Power control is performed only 6: BER 6.4% and to 12.8% when signal level than exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Level the 7: BER greater 12.8% The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an When power and control stepthreshold. is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper upper the threshold a lower Power control is not performed if the signal level threshold lower threshold ofthe thelower quality zone arePower set. When theissignal qualityonly is betweenand thethe upper threshold and threshold. control performed exceeds upper threshold is below lower threshold, control is when thethe signal level exceedsorthe upper the threshold or is belowpower the lower threshold. performed. This parameter the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power The level values 0 through specifies 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. control. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper The mapping BER andofthe as set. follows: threshold andbetween the lowerthe threshold thequality qualitylevel zoneisare When the signal quality Level 0: the BERupper smaller than 0.2% exceeds threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% performed. Levelparameter 2: BER ranges from 0.4% 0.8%quality upper threshold of the quality zone. This determines the to uplink Level BER ranges from to 1.6% Note: 3: The power of the MS0.8% and the BTS is adjusted according to the quality and the LevelFor 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% level. details, refer to the Power Control 2nd Generation Control table. Levelmapping 5: BER ranges from to 6.4% The between the3.2% BER and the quality level is as follows: Level Level 6: 0: BER BER ranges smaller from than 6.4% 0.2% to 12.8% Level than 0.2% 12.8% Level 7: 1: BER BER greater ranges from to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% The control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an Levelpower 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% upper threshold and from a lower threshold. Level 4: BER ranges 1.6% to 3.2% Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upperfrom threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only Level 5: BER ranges 3.2% to 6.4% when theBER signal levelfrom exceeds upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Level 6: ranges 6.4%the to 12.8% The values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. Levellevel 7: BER greater than 12.8% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for predicting the level in power control. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment. This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting This parameter specifies the level in power control.whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is allowed byIIHuawei II poweralgorithm, control algorithm. In Huawei power control the average filter value in the history When this parameter is not set used to Yes, Huawei II power control algorithm puts the measurement report is forthe power control decision. Instead, the prediction currently reports in thethe measurement report compensation function isreceived applied measurement in the filter to compensate delay of power adjustment. queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. After values are added in the measurement report, compensate the receive level value in the history measurement report based on the change of the power. When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained at different transmit power of the BTS/MS. To ensure the accuracy of the values for sampled filtering, for thecalculating values in the This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports history measurement reports that are obtained a different transmit from the the average value of the downlink signal qualityat before the BTS power power adjustment. current power must be compensated.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power control commands.

This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of 2 dB. If this parameter is set 5, the power ranges from class 0 to class 4.

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the In control, if the receive quality is greater than or equal the DLdownlink Qual. Badpower Trig Threshold, the downlink value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains thetovalue value parameter, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL of the of DLthis Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% In uplink power control, if 6.4% the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL Level 6: BER ranges from to 12.8% In the Bad uplink power control, if the quality is greater thanshould or equal to theUL Qual. Trig Threshold, theuplink actualreceive UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contain Level 7: BER greater than then 12.8% value of this parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control. Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2% Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% Level 5: BER ranges from 3.2% to 6.4% Level 6: BER ranges from 6.4% to 12.8% Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the signal quality.

This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive level.

This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the receive quality. In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 12, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step when(0, RQ1-is In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades 2. 2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set for each quality zone. When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality. This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step when(0, RQ1-is In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades 1. 2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is After BSCquality delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period set forthe each zone. before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, thelevel, MR that control When downward power adjustment is performed based on the the power maximum decision is based cannot accurately reflect the environment of the BTS during permissible down on adjustment step differs based onradio the receive quality. the adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive levelstep and when receive Thispower parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment RQ is quality of the BTS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed. 0. To compensate the delay power adjustment, the power control algorithm implements After the BSC delivers the of power control command, it should wait for a certain period the prediction and function. In message. other words, the BSCthe samples several before receiving anfiltering acknowledgement Therefore, MR that powerdownlink control measurement reports, performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurement reports decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during from the current time onwards in athe short period. the power adjustment, but misses latest changes of the receive level and receive This parameter determines the number of downlink measurement reports predicted by quality of the MS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed. the BSC. The value this of parameter equals to the number N. To compensate the of delay power adjustment, the previous power control algorithm implements In Huawei II power control function. algorithm,Inthe average in the history the prediction and filtering other words,filter the value BSC samples several uplink measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction measurement reports, performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurement reports function applied in the filter to the delay of power adjustment. from the is current time onwards incompensate athe short period. This parameter specifies whether compensation of measurement reports is allowed This parameter determines the number of uplink measurement reports predicted by the by Huawei II power control algorithm. BSC. In other words, the value of this parameter equals toBSC the previous N. When determining whether to perform power control, the performsnumber weighted In Huawei power control the average filter valuequality in the in history filtering on IIthe values of thealgorithm, receive level and of the receive several history measurement is The not measurement used for powerreports controlmay decision. Instead,bythe measurement report reports. be obtained theprediction BTS/MS at function appliedpower. in the filter to compensate the of delay power different is transmit To ensure the accuracy the of values foradjustment. filtering, the values in the history measurement reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from the current power must be compensated. This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper This parameter specifies whether enable Huaweizone II power control algorithm or Huawei threshold and the lower threshold of the quality are set. When the signal quality III power control algorithm. exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control. The mapping between the BER the quality level is assignal follows: When the power control step is and calculated based on the quality, the upper Level 0: BER than 0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality threshold andsmaller the lower threshold Level 1: the BERupper ranges from 0.2% tobelow 0.4% the lower threshold, power control is exceeds threshold or is Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% power control. Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level Level 5: 0: BER BER ranges smaller from than 3.2% 0.2% to 6.4% Level Level 6: 1: BER BER ranges ranges from from 6.4% 0.2% to to 12.8% 0.4% Level than 0.4% 12.8% Level 7: 2: BER BER greater ranges from to 0.8%

Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% upper and afrom lower threshold. Level threshold 5: BER ranges 3.2% to 6.4%Power control is not performed if the signal level isLevel between theranges upperfrom threshold the lower threshold. Power control is performed only 6: BER 6.4% and to 12.8% when signal level than exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Level the 7: BER greater 12.8% The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an When power and control stepthreshold. is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper upper the threshold a lower Power control is not performed if the signal level threshold lower threshold ofthe thelower quality zone arePower set. When theissignal qualityonly is betweenand thethe upper threshold and threshold. control performed exceeds upper threshold is below lower threshold, control is when thethe signal level exceedsorthe upper the threshold or is belowpower the lower threshold. performed. This parameter the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power The level values 0 through specifies 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. control. The mapping between the BER the quality level is assignal follows: When the power control step is and calculated based on the quality, the upper Level 0: BER than 0.2% of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality threshold andsmaller the lower threshold Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4% exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is Level 2: BER ranges from 0.4% to 0.8% performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% control. Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows: Level Level 5: 0: BER BER ranges smaller from than 3.2% 0.2% to 6.4% Level Level 6: 1: BER BER ranges ranges from from 6.4% 0.2% to to 12.8% 0.4% Level than 0.4% 12.8% Level 7: 2: BER BER greater ranges from to 0.8% Level 3: BER ranges from 0.8% to 1.6% The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an Level 4: BER ranges from 1.6% to 3.2% upper and afrom lower threshold. Level threshold 5: BER ranges 3.2% to 6.4%Power control is not performed if the signal level isLevel between theranges upperfrom threshold the lower threshold. Power control is performed only 6: BER 6.4% and to 12.8% when signal level than exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. Level the 7: BER greater 12.8% The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm. This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control commands.

This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times.

This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is measured for the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH.

This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode, which is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of the output power. Thethe parameter specifies theperiod relation Cnidle andmode, Cn-1. which ThisMS parameter specifies signal strength filter in between the packet is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode. This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output power. The parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1. This parameter specifies the initial power level. This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control. This parameter is used for the open-loop power control. The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH, namely, PCH. When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter determines the This parameter the maximum of N3105. reduced level ofspecifies the MS transmit power value mapping to the path loss. After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105. Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network resets the N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field; otherwise, the network increases N3105 This parameter specifies the maximum valueinofwhich the N3103. by one and resends the downlink data block the RRBP field is set. Upon the last RLC block when the transmission is complete, the Whenreceiving N3105 overflows, thedata network initiates theuplink T3195. When the timer T3195 expires, network sends MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the the current TBFthe abnormally releases. N3103. If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within scheduled time,specifies the N3103 byvalue one and the network resends the Packet Uplink This parameter theincreases maximum of N3101. Ack/Nack message. In uplink dynamic assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if When this counter overflows, the initiates the T3169. When this timer expires, the downlink data blocks carry thenetwork USF value. This parameter the release delay of the downlink TBF. the current TBF specifies abnormally releases. After the network starts to assign a USF value the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is data After sending the last downlink RLC data block to and confirming that all downlink established), the N3101 is initiated. The network reserves the RLC uplink blocks this blocks are received, the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing mapping to each set USFthe forlast the data uplink datanot sent from the MS. If thekeep network valid TBF but forcedly block received. Therefore, this receives TBF uplink data by blocks from the MS, the network resets the N3101; otherwise, the N3101 unreleased continuously resending the last downlink data block with the Relative increases by one. Reserved Block Period (RRBP) flag. During the release delay of a downlink TBF, as long When this counter overflows, the has current uplink TBF abnormally releases. This parameter specifies inactive period of the extended uplink TBF. as the upper layer of the the network a requirement of downlink data transmission, the Upon receiving the last blocks (CountValue=0) from thesame MS that extracted downlink RLC uplink blocksRLC can data be sent on this downlink TBF. At the time, the supports extendedTBF uplink TBF function, the network does not release this uplink status of the downlink changes from release delay to downlink transmission. In TBF immediately but the set release it to thedelay, inactive To transmit uplink RLC data blocks addition, during themode. MS must send thethe Packet Downlink Ack/Nack during inactive cancorresponding use this TBF that automatically becomes message on theperiod, uplink the dataMS block to the RRBP to maintain theactive instead of establishing new uplink TBF. When thethe inactive period no uplink communication with thea network. Therefore, when MS needs toexpires, send theif uplink RLC block needs to berequest transmitted, theChannel networkRequest sends the MS a Packet Uplink data,data it can send an uplink through Description carried in Ac the message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing the uplink TBF. In addition, when an Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message. uplink TBF 0 is specifies inactive, a downlink TBF canfunction still establish this uplink TBF. The parameter value that release delay of the on downlink TBF is disabled. This specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF. The extended TBF function improve the network KPIs, especially for Upon receivinguplink the last uplink RLC can datagreatly block (CountValue=0), the network sends the the discontinuous uplink transmission (such as interactive transmission and Ping) MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this services. uplink TBF. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will The value 0 specifies thatthis the uplink extended TBF function disabled (Also deactivate notify the MS of releasing TBFuplink for a period of delayisafter this parameter is set. this function on the BSC side). After the downlink TBF establishes successfully or after the delay time exceeds the setting time of non-extended uplink TBF, this uplink TBF will automatically release. The value 0 specifies that the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF is disabled. This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level is lower than this threshold.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. If the receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is worsened.

This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period; If the number of times is lower than this parameter, the cell reselection is allowed.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell reselection procedure.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in neighbor cells.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter, the previous MR is thought to be invalid. This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the cell can receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. That is, the cell will receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage.

The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold.

This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of MS. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission quality measurement report reaches this threshold.

This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality measurement report is lower than this threshold.

This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The cell penalty can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.

This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. This parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time.

To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell reselection, the level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as This parameter whether to support the QoS optimization. a candidate cell specifies for handover. The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. The QoS level is determined in the subscription. The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability class, delay class, and throughput class. During the negotiation of a QoS profile, an MS can apply a value for each QoS attribute. This specifies the policy thethe handover the aunderlaid Afterparameter receiving the request from theofMS, networkbetween negotiates class for subcell each and the overlaid subcell inprofile a PS domain. attribute of each QoS based on the current effective GPRS resources. The In version V9R8, the supports theprofile PDCH with configured in the overlaid subcell or in the network provides theBSC negotiated QoS corresponding resources. underlaid subcell, supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the Not Support: QoS and not supported; underlaid subcell. Support: QoS supported. The overlaid-to-underlaid subcell handover, underlaid-to-overlaid subcell handover, bidirectional handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell, and no handover This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay the POCfor services. between between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell areofallowed the handover The POC services have subcell a strict and requirement on the transmission delay. The networkthis between the underlaid the overlaid subcell in a PS domain; by default, should support of the POC service type and take measures subcell. to reduce the parameter is setthe to detection no handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer Delay in the This specifies of parameter. the bandwidth for the POC services. ABQPparameter must be lower thanthe theupper value limit of this The POC services strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network POC：push to talkhave over a cellular. should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower for than the upper limit of the This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth the POC services. bandwidth for the have POC services. The POC services a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network POC：push to talk cellular. should support theover detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services. If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink bandwidth GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower than the upper limit of the This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment, that is, the bandwidth for the POC services. assignment of talk the over packet channel to the MS through the PACCH, this only involves the POC：push to cellular. takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves This parameter whether to support the packet immediate uplink resourcesspecifies for the BTS. The BTS obtainsthe thetakeover channel of request information of the MS assignment by the It is relative to the uplink immediate by interpreting the BTS. downlink acknowledgment message from assignment. the MS, and assigns the To improve the speed of the access the BSS reserved uplink resources to MS the to MS. Then,the thenetwork, MS can send the pre-allocates data blocks. the uplink TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. When the MS initiates the channel request, the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment message to the MS. Upon receiving the immediate assignment message sent by the BTS, the MS can upload the data block. Meanwhile, the BTS needs to send the additional When both the MS and theto network support PFC, the QoS are obtained from channel request message the BSC. Upon receiving this parameters request message, the BSC the ABQP the PFC. immediate assignment message to the BTS to complete the setup sends the in additional When or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained of the the TBF MS process. from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS. Gbr:guaranteed bit rate. PFC: packet flow context. ABQP：Aggregate BSS QoS Profile.

This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you should dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all TBFs. This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this parameter to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you dynamically adjust the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all TBFs. This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink. To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to a value among MCS1-MCS9. To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During the data transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to This parameter specifies average period environment, of bit error detected. dynamically adapt to the the radio transmission thus improving the quality of This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor, which is used for the MS to links. calculate the effect measurement results. - Setting and Link Adaption (LA): The network dynamically adjusts the coding scheme of a channel based on the transmission quality of the channel link. The link quality is determined by 8PSK MEAN BEP and 8PSK CV BEP carried in the Packet EGPRS Downlink Ack/Nack message. The network selects a proper coding scheme for transmission based on the measurement reports from the MS. For cells with good Um interface quality, the LA mode is usually used. Incremental Redundancy (IR): The network should retransmit only different data blocks This specifies thescheme. retransmission threshold for the CSinformation type of the and the with parameter the puncturing coding The MS rate buffers the history error downlink TBF to retransmitted change from CS4 to CS3. data blocks are through combined error correction. In the cell with bad When the retransmission rate of the downlink is transmission larger than orquality, equals but to the Um interface quality, the IR mode can achieveTBF good thevalue MS of thissupport parameter, the CSFor type of the changes fromthe CS4IRtomode CS3. is usually must this mode. cells withdownlink bad Um TBF interface quality, used. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the default CS types.

This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can be set to CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS2. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS1. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS1. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS3 to CS4. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS2 to CS3. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS2 to CS3. This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to change from CS1 to CS2. When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS1 to CS2. This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink. To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on the signal transmission quality. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the default CS types. This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink. If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be set to CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4. If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The background class service is a kind of traffic class services.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP2.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1).

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP2.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1 (ARP1).

This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots. When a channel is idle, this timer is started. When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.

This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services. This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and PS services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted. All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels. Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the dynamic channels except for the control channels. This parameter specifies theservices timer set to release the idle dynamic channel all TBFs Dynamic channels carrying cannot be preempted: It indicates thatafter the CS on the dynamic services cannot channel preemptare thereleased. dynamic channels that carry services. If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not released immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle. Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel continues to be used and the timer is stopped. When the timer expires, the dynamic channel is released. This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell.

This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold. The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold. The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, dynamic channels are used. This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion. When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, dynamic channels are used. This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total number of TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs + static PDCHs). This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number of TCHs + PDCHs.

This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value. Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the frequency of one strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells; Reporting the frequencies of three strongest cells This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength. The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31, which is used for cell reselection.

This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell. Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority.

This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet control channel.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the system.

This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Only the MSs customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell.

This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection. Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted. Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited. This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas. When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the target cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell, and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.

This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell. Yes: The MS can access another cell. No: The MS cannot access another cell. This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. Value range: 0, 1 0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. 1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection. This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31 standards. This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area. c31standard: applied When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the c31notuse: not applied target cell belong to the same routing area, the C2 value measured in the overlapped

area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio channels. Therefore, the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell reselection not only increases the signaling flow on the network and affects the utilization of radio resources, but also greatly affects the data transmission rate of the MS and decreases the QoS as a consequence. When this parameter is used, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the neighbor cells in the same routing area is higher than that of this cell, and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard to start cell reselection.

This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported. Yes: supported No: not supported

This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to the network.

This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in real time. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This occupies many resources. This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

This parameter specifies the persistence level 3 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

This parameter specifies the persistence level 2 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

This parameter specifies the persistence level 1 of radio priority access. A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request after the channel request fails. This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive channel requests. The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is received after the minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access request. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 4.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 3.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 2.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 1.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.

This parameter specifies the access control class. This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PRACH. Value 2 indicates two PRACHs. ... Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs. This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 12. Value 1 indicates one PAGCH. Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs. ... Valueparameter 12 indicates four PBCCHs. This specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges from 1 to 4. Value 1 indicates one PBCCH. Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs. Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs. Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.

This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet transfer mode.

This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet idle mode.

This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode after the NC NC-measurement report is sent. The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report is sent.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A higher value indicates a higher access priority.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent through the system message broadcast in each cell. When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires. This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS. Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is shorter than the penalty time. Value infinity indicates an infinity offset. This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement report interval between two extension measurement reports. Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type 3. Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC. Type 2: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network. For the six carriers, the BSIC must be decoded successfully and the NCC specified by NCC_PERMITTED is carried. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and BSIC. Type 3: The MS does not need to decode the BSIC of the carriers that send the measurement Thethe measurement report contain the received signal level3 This parameterreport. specifies frequency index ofshould the interference measurement in type and interference measurement report. of a carrier. of the extension measurement

This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS. The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report that matches the bitmap.

The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the MS is in idle mode, it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter can be set to em0 or em1. This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported. Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service. This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported. Yes: supported No: not supported

This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The 2bit Radio This parameter thethe routing color code of a GPRS cell.message has four Priority messagespecifies carried by MS inarea the Packet Channel Request levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. When an MS accesses the network, the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for establishing the TBF for a channel only when the radio priority reaches the access priority of the cell. The values of this parameter area as follows: No packet access This parameter Packet access ofspecifies level 1 whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH the cell. Packetofaccess of levels 1-2 SPLIT_PG_CYCLE used1-3 to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS supporting the Packet access of is levels SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH, this parameter is optional. Packet access of levels 1-4 Yes: parameter transmitted on the CCCH of the In theThe cellSPLIT_PG_CYCLE reselection required by theisnetwork, the network requests thecell. MS to send No: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is not transmitted on the of the cell. measurement reports to control its cell reselection. There are CCCH three network control modes. nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection. nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement reports to the network and performs automatic cell reselection. nc2: Network control. The MS sends measurement reports to the network but does not perform automatic cell reselection. This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum value of N3102. Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A), the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC. Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7; value No use indicates that this parameter is not used. This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the MS decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC. Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7; value No use This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS. indicates that this parameter is not used. This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. The parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer. Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the data block is set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message before T3198 expires, it updates the receive state of each uplink RLC data block based on the acknowledgment bitmap contained in the message. If T3198 for the RLC block in the Pending state expires, the MS setstype the receive of this data This data parameter specifies the acknowledgment message used bystate the MS. block Nack pulses and retransmits block. If fourto access are used, the the data timing advance can be obtained without a polling message. If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained only by sending a polling message. Four access pulses are recommended.

This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and PTCCH/U. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment message. This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. DRX 8bit: access using the 8-bitisburst (discontinuous reception) a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message. 11bit: The MSaccess stays using in the the DRX11-bit modeburst for a certain period when changing from the packet SI13 indicates access burst transfer mode the to the packet idletype. mode. After the TBF is released, the MS monitors all the CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS context. The reservation depends on the the MS smaller value between DRX_Timer_Max This parameter specifies time the timer set for to wait for the TBF release after and NON_DRX_TIMER. is negotiated with the SGSN during the GPRS receiving the last data NON_DRX_TIMER block. attachment ofreceives the MS and is usually Therefore, reservation timeand When the MS the its lastvalue RLC data blockhigh. carrying the lastthe block flag (FBI=1) actually on RLC DRX_TIMER_MAX. confirmsdepends that all the data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet Value 0 indicates that the MScarrying enters the immediately. flag (FAI=1) and starts Downlink Ack/Nack message theDRX finalmode acknowledgement Value 1 indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode one second later. Value n indicates T3192 at the same time. that the MS enters the DRX mode the n seconds later. and monitors paging channels. If T3192 expires, the MS releases TBF resources This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink During the TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Assignment message. Uplink Assignment message, the MS responds This parameter specifies the maximum intervalimmediately. set for the MS to wait for the Packet If the MS does not receive theAfter Packet Assignment message during the TBF Uplink Assignment message. theUplink MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet release process, themessage MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, Downlink Ack/Nack carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to it enters thePacket dedicated mode. wait for the Uplink Assignment message from the network. If the MS thechannel Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 Based on receives the paging used by the system, the network operation modes are is reset. Otherwise, the Operation MS initiates the I, PSNetwork access procedure fourNetwork times. If the classified into Network Mode Operation again Mode for II, and Packet Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink Operation Mode III. TBF establishment has failed. When the GS interface is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used. When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation Mode II is used. When the Gs interface is not configured but the PCCCH is configured, Network Operation Mode III is used.

Configuration Policy

The network has four layers, numbered 1-4 respectively. If the number of the layer is small, the priority of the layer is high. This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells for None

None

This parameter should be set as required.

1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is incon Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. If the number of the priority is small, the priority is high. This parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells fo

None

None

None

None

None

None Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in advance. No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there are more than 32 neighbor cells. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC reports the information about a maximum of 32 neighbor cells to the PC

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system int The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate may be affected.

None

None

None

As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell. The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use different frequency reuse modes. The concentric cell technology can be combined

None

When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is not configured in the UL subcell. The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following benefits: 1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment

is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter should be set to No. Call reestablishment If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be activated. Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated. When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level Generally, the timeslots are automatically calculated and BTS is set The to Not Activated. assigned. timeslots, however, can be also manually assigned to meet the requirement of operators. The manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when the timeslot is arranged. The manually assigned OML timeslots can only be modified manually. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

None

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied subrack.

None

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied E1 port. If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface board, the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-BSC Port No. must be set to different E1 ports on the interface board.

This parameter is to be viewed only.

None

None

None The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH, including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The doubleAdjust the cell coverage by configuring theRF Power transceiver BTSs supportarea the baseband FH and FH, Level; however, when FH theand antenna over high covers including the timeslot frameisFH, but do and not support too cells, you should lower the many cross-cabinet baseband FH. the antenna and increase the tilt of the antenna first. When the transmit power of a BTS reduces, the indoor coverage becomes worse. Generally, for cells of the same priority in a network, the power level configuration should ensure that the EIRPs of the cells are basically the same. When configuring the power level, you should note that different TRXs in a cell can have different losses due to different combination modes. None

None

The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is. In other similar conditions, channels are allocated to the TRX with higher priority.

None

None

This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value, the cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the TRX output power, resulting in the failure of channel allocation.

None

This parameter is to be viewed only.

This parameter is to be viewed only.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and physical slot number. When configuring RSL links, set this parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM.

This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set to Auto. You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to Manual. When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this parameter is 0.

None

None

None

None The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function correlates has the following benefits: The value of this parameter with Cell ExtType. If 1. On the uplink: power consumption of the this parameter is decreasing set to a toothe small value, the handover MS and reducing interference success rate maysystem be affected. 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side. If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX None be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter. cannot If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell. None

None

None

None If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels.

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is allowed. If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor coverage, this parameter be settotostop No.power The DTX function allows ashould transmitter Call reestablishment lasts longtransfer. time, and therefore the transmission in the case of for no a voice This function subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It is recommended has the following benefits: that be set tothe Yes.power consumption of the 1. Onthis theparameter uplink: decreasing

MS and reducing system interference 2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS, reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation inside the BTS 3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference is reduced and the network quality is improved. None

None

None

None

None

None When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU board exceeds the maximum permissible output power, the power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. If the data configuration detects that the power sharing must be used, but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is disabled. The power must be adjusted or the downlink power control must be enabled. None

None

None

None

None If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced. If this this parameter parameter is is set set to to a a higher lower value, If value,the thehalf-rate half-rate channels channels are are assigned assigned to to the the MS MS only only when when the the channel channel seizure calls use the seizure ratio ratio of of overlaid overlaid subcell subcell is is very very low. high.The Insufficient half-rate channel even if there are enough full-rate half-rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the channels, influences the speech quality. capacity ofwhich the BSC is reduced. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very low. The calls use the half-rate channel even if there are enough full-rate channels, which influences the speech quality. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst influence may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise.

This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is imprecise. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists. If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference indication message will not be reported even though the interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the interference indication message will be reported even though no interference exists.

None

None

None

None

None

It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in multiband network.

None

None

Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed be set to No, the forced handover may fail in the concentric cell. In a normal cell, Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot If this parameter too small,initthe cannot arrangement can is beset performed cell. correctly indicate the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and affects the network performance. If this parameter is set too large, the channel allocation algorithm becomes less sensitive and consequently the SDCCHs stay in idle state and cannot be rolled back for a long of time. If thisperiod parameter is set too small, the SDCCHs in the cell may be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be initiated, thus affecting the access of users. It is meaningless to set the parameter too large.

If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a small number of requests for SDCCHs, the SDCCHs of a cell are in idle state; If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a large number of requests for SDCCHs, the requests cannot meet the requirements. The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7.40 kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding None rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected simultaneously. If only one coding rate is specified by this parameter, then the parameter AMR Starting Mode (H) must be set to 0, which means the lowest coding rate. All AMR coding rate None adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless. If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless. The AMRcoding ACS (F/H) contains at most rates.then If three rates are specified byfour thiscoding parameter, Therefore, theMode value(H) of can this be parameter AMR Starting set to 0,ranges 1, or 2.from The 0 to 3. The values 0AMR to 3 UL match those of adj.th1 the coding of AMR parameters Coding Rate (H),rates AMR UL Coding ACS Rate(F/H). adj.hyst1 (H), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless. None If four coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. All the AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningful. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12.2 kbit/s None to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected simultaneously. If only one coding full rate is specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (F) must be set to 0. All the AMR None coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless. If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F), AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless. If three coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR Mode (F) can set value, to 0, 1,the or call 2. The If thisStarting parameter is set to a be great completion parameters AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (F), AMR ULisCoding rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network Rate adj.hyst1 AMR DLincreases Coding Rate adj.th1(F), improved. This,(F), however, the load of the and BSC.AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are To improve the success rate of reassignment, it is meaningless. recommended that the value Different Band be If four coding rates are default specified by this parameter, then used. That is, Mode the frequency band of 0, the1,preferentially AMR Starting (F) can be set to 2, or 3. All the reassigned is different from what is used in theare AMR codingchannel rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis original assignment. meaningful. Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during an upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this parameter must be set to No. If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive short messages. In satellite transmission mode, this function can be enabled to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission on the signaling processing rate. For terrestrial transmission, the default value of this parameter is No.

None

The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A, B, and 0-4). The two highest priorities are reserved only for local use in the network. Priorities 0-4 are used for subscribers all over the world. If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the If this parameter is set to MS Yes,(including the BSC initiates a resupport of the MSC, HLR, SIM) is required. assignment when receiving an assignment failure message from the Um interface. This helps to improve the call completion rate and the QoS of the network. If there are a large number of assignment failure messages, the BSC initiates many re-assignment procedures and thus the BSC load increases. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It maps with C/I in GSM. RSCP, Received Signal Code Power

None

None

None

Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR.

None

None

position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighboring cells regardless of the bands at which the neighboring cells are located. If this parameter is set to 2, the MS reports the measurement results of two neighbor cell known and permitted by the NCC at each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the neighbor cell at the band serving the current cell in the redundant position. If the redundant position is still available, the MS reports the measurement results of other neighbor cells regardless of For 900/1800 MHzthe CoBCCH cell,cells it is are recommended that the a bands at which neighbor located. this parameter beis set toto Yes. If this parameter set 3, the MS reports the For a 1800 MHz cell inof the dual-band network, it is and measurement results three neighbor cells known recommended that this setthe to Yes. permitted by the NCC atparameter each bandbe with best signal (the If theserving A5/4-7 the encryption is used, itThe is MS reports band current algorithm cell not included). recommended thatresult this parameter be setcell to Yes. the measurement of the neighbor at the band If this parameter is set small value, radio linksIfare serving the current cellto in athe redundant position. thelikely to be faultyposition and therefore call drops the occur. redundant is still available, MS reports the If this parameter is setoftoother a great value, cells a long time lastsof measurement results neighbor regardless before an MS disconnects a call, and resource the bands at which the neighbor cellstherefore are located. usage low. Thisvolumes parameter takes effect on are the the downlink. When is the traffic of multiple bands same and there is no special requirement on the band, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 0. When the traffic volumes of multiple bands are different and the MS is expected to enter None a band preferentially, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 3. In other cases except the first two cases, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 1 or 2. For details, see GSM Rec. This parameter can be used to control network load based 05.08. on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. This parameter can be used to control network load based on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used. This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not obvious. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not obvious. If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is sent. If the parameter is set to No, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is not sent. If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. None

None

None

None

None

None Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not send the LAPDm N200 parameter. IfIftimer setsupport to a toothis small value, the transmit end a BTST200 doesisnot parameter, the parameter may mistakenly that the the linkBTS is faulty andbethe data should be set to regard No. Otherwise, cannot transmission fails before the transmit end receives a initialized. response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 success rate transmission is reduced.If T200 and If timer is set toof a too small value, the transmit end N200mistakenly are set to too great values, theischannels are seized may regard that the link faulty and the data all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted. transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 success rate transmission is reduced.If T200 and If timer is set toof a too small value, the transmit end N200 are set to too great values, theischannels are seized may mistakenly regard that the link faulty and the data all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted. transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 success rate transmission is reduced.If T200 and If timer is set toof a too small value, the transmit end N200mistakenly are set to too great values, theischannels are seized may regard that the link faulty and the data all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted. transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 success rate transmission is reduced.If T200 and If timer is set toof a too small value, the transmit end N200 are set to too great values, theischannels are seized may mistakenly regard that the link faulty and the data all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted. transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the T200 success rate transmission is reduced.If T200 and If timer is set toof a too small value, the transmit end N200 are set to too great values, theischannels are seized may mistakenly regard that the link faulty and the data all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted. transmission fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced If timer is set toof a too small value, the transmit end and the T200 success rate transmission is reduced.If T200 and may regard that the link faulty and the data all N200mistakenly are set to too great values, theischannels are seized transmission fails before the transmit end receives a along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are wasted. response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of transmission is decreased. If T200 and N200 are set to too great values, the channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus, resources are Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set according to wasted. the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS access level. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than RACH Min.Access Level. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the allowable error for the random access signal is high and an MS can easily access the network. But the error report rate is high. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the error report rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the network.

function. BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in this cell. BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions after the originally configured BCCH TRX is recovered. Baseband FH aiding: When the TRX involved in baseband FH in the cell is faulty or BCCH aiding is performed in the cell, baseband FH aiding occurs and the cell is initialized as a non-hopping cell. Baseband FH aiding switchback: When all the TRXs involved in baseband hopping in the cell are recovered and the originally configured BCCH TRX is normal, baseband FH aiding switchback can be performed and the cell is restored to the baseband FH mode. None After TRX aiding (BCCH aiding or baseband FH aiding) or switchback occurs, the cell is re-initialized. All BTSs has will strong not perform the aiding function within Thetypes AMR of coding anti-interference capabilities. 15 minutes afterframe the default cellrate is initialized Under the same erasure (FER), the(you AMRcan coding configureathe in this period). with non-AMR coding. If supports lowBTSs C/I ratio compared the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) AMR coding mode can be a little more The AMR coding in has strong anti-interference capabilities. than that in non-AMR coding mode. Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) AMR coding mode can be a little more The AMR coding in has strong anti-interference capabilities. than non-AMR mode. Underthat thein same framecoding erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) AMR coding mode can be a little more The AMR coding in has strong anti-interference capabilities. than that in non-AMR coding mode. Under the same frame erasion rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be a little more than in of non-AMR coding mode. If thethat value the parameter is too high, the cells with

heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target cells. For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure None the balance between the uplink and the downlink. This parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST during asynchronous handover. For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this Properly setting parameter can increase the paging parameter does this not affect MS access but affects the success rate. If this parameter is set to a too great by value, reporting of CCCH_LOAD_IND. If the level received the congestion may occur.side is greater than the RACH Busy BCCH on the network Threshold, the CCCH_LOAD_IND is counted once whether the decoding is successful. The RACH whose level is lower than the RACH Busy Threshold and whose decoding is successful is also counted. The measurement period is the Average RACH Load Timeslot Number. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS easily considers that the RACH timeslot is busy and reports overload messages to the BSC. If the value is too great, the If thecannot value of this parameter does the value BTS determine the status ofnot thematch RACH with timeslot The physical sent is over the FACCH. Four TDMA supported byinformation the BTS, anisalarm generated. correctly. frames sentifeach time at theisinterval 18 ms. If the For the are BTS24, this parameter used toofdetermine busy value of T3105 is smaller than orwith equal to 18 ms,BTS30. the BTS timeslot, its setting is consistent that in the If needs to retransmit physical information the MS this parameter is thethe level threshold for valid to random when the T3105 expires for thethat firstintime.If the access, itstimer setting is consistent with the BTS20. transmission of the the BTS312, physical BTS3001C, informationBTS3001C+, over the FACCH is The settings of not complete, expiration is invalid time is BTS3002C, andthe double-transceiver BTSbecause must bethe consistent shorter than an FACCH period.Considering the previous with the meaning and requirement of the BTS30. The value of this parameter can be increased when factors, 20becomes ms is theslow reasonable minimumsuccess value for this handover or the handover rate parameter. At present, the default value of this parameter is decreases because of clock problems or poor 70 ms. transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.

This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter, the more difficult for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier During a handover this is set to for the BSC to handdecision, over the ifMS to parameter a TDD 3G cell. Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate cells; If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells; If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred. None

If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving handover.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow load is increased.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow load is increased.

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow load is increased.

None

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow load is increased.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be triggered.

If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value, load balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is adversely affected. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased.

This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is applied.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the more difficult During the handover decision: for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier If is set tothe Preference 2G3G Cell, the BSC forthis theparameter BSC to hand over MS to anfor FDD cell. first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate cells. If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells. If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold, and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than or equal to HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is None preferred. Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic.

This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the UL subcell is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the OL subcell is increased. When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0, no penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is imposed. That is, the call can still be handed over to the previous target cell after the penalty time.

None

None

This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

None

This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.

This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell. For the network with a single frequency band, inter-BSC handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells. Therefore, the recommended value of this parameter is Underlaid Subcell. For a dual-band network (for example, 900/1800 MHz cells), incoming BSC handovers occur frequently and are generally not triggered at the edges of adjacent cells. In this case, the recommended value of this parameter is Overlaid Subcell. In the case that success rate of handovers drops, UL Subcell is preferred for incoming BSC handovers. None

None

None

When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0, the TCH in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. In this case, Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.

None

None

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.

#N/A

None

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is determined by different factors.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based on the K principle. This parameter affects the ranking of candidate cells. Generally, it is set to 0.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur.

Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located at the fourth layer.

None

This parameter, together with Forbidden time after MAX Times, determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers.

This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover for a certain period.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-cell handover may not be timely; if this parameter is set to a too great value, the system resources may be wasted when intra-cell handovers occur frequently.

When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of this parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the more the difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively; if this parameter is set to a too small value, the judgment on whether the MS fast passes a cell may be incorrect. The setting of this parameter affects the width of the handover strip during load handover.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover time. If it is set to a too greater value, the handover time of each level is long.

The setting of this parameter determines the maximum width of the handover strip during load handover.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover targeted to the cell. If it is set to a lower value, the number of handover requests that are rejected increases.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the load handover. If it is set to a lower value, the number of load handovers increases. The value of this parameter should not be set too high. Load handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower than the setting of this parameter. Otherwise, the load on the system is increased. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small value. This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a too small value.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement report is greater than the value of this parameter, the handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink measurement report handover cannot be triggered. The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher value, the no downlink measurement report handover cannot be triggered.

This parameter is set according to the traffic volume.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover.

Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops rapidly. The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA emergency handover.isInset thetoareas small space When this parameter 0 andwith if the measurement between BTSs and densely BTSs, the coverage report indicates that DTX is distributed not used, the FULLSET values of the cell can be reduced if this parameter a lower should be selected. When this parameter is is setset to to 0 and if value. the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the

SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the SUBSET values should be used irrespective of how DTX is indicated in the subsequent measurement reports. When this parameter is set to 1, whether the FULLSET values or the SUBSET values should be selected depends on the DTX indication measurement Thatcell is, if If this parameter is bit setintothe a too great value,report. the target the measurement report indicates that DTX is for used, for the previous handover will not be selected thethe next SUBSET values should be selected; the FULLSET handover, but the probability of callotherwise, drop increases. If this values should be selected. parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of handover failure increases. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be modified. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher This parameter the on a value, the MS is specifies unlikely to bepenalty handedlevel overimposed to the original target servingcell. cell.A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of the following reasons: cell congestion, a message indicating internal handover refusal is received, a message indicating Um interface handover failure is received during out-going BSC handover, or a message indicating Um interface handover failure is received during internal handover. This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of penalty time. sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.

When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.

Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the signal strength in the serving cell is poor. When the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter, all previous measurement reports are discarded and the handover may fail. Therefore, Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to a great value for emergency handovers. If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, this adjacent cell can be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate and flow on the Abis interface. If the preprocessed MR is sent at a high frequency, the flow on the Abis interface is increased. When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL balance measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is set to No. In addition, the handovers (such as PBGT handovers, load handovers, and concentric cell handovers) that require power compensation may fail. In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two timeslots this When thisconfigured parameterin is SDCCH/8 set to NO,scheme, the BSCthen preprocesses the parameter should be set No. measurement reports. In to this case, the Transfer Original MR, Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR parameters are invalid. When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on the Abis interface and the load of the BSC are reduced. Thus, the response time is shortened and the network performance is improved. When setting this parameter, you should determine whether the BTS supports the configured power control If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the algorithms. maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. If you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover, set the related penalty time and penalty level to 0.

This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH handover is allowed.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.

This to aavoid unwanted If thisparameter parameterisisused set to too small value,handovers frequent due to inaccurate measurement reports generated in the initial handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a phase of call establishment. too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed Measurement Reports smaller can thanbe the report frequency of thehandovers This parameter used to avoid unwanted measurement reports from the MS. Therefore, is phase due to inaccurate measurement reports in the it initial recommended that Min Interval for SDCCH HOs be set to a of call establishment. small value. If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you If measurement reports are on the BSC side, the can set Report Frequency of processed the Preprocessed Measurement frequency of receiving measurement reports on the BSC Reports smaller than the report frequency of the side is greater reports than that on the the MS. BTS Therefore, side. Therefore, measurement from it is it is recommended HOs recommended that that Min Min Interval Interval for for SDCCH TCH HOs be be setset to ato a great value. small value. If measurement reports are processed on the BSC side, the frequency of receiving measurement reports on the BSC side is greater than that on the BTS side. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for TCH HOs be set to a great value.

None According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. Thus, the TCHs non-BCCH are reserved for According to theon P/N criterion,frequencies if the load of a non-BCCH other calls.isThis ensures of TIGHT other calls. frequency higher than the the call Loadperformance Threshold for BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. Thus, the TCHs on non-BCCH frequencies are reserved for other calls. This ensures the call performance of other calls. None

The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes. 1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. This leads to handover failures or call drops. set because it limits the 1. This parameter must be properly 2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when receive number of candidate cells. If this parameter is setthe to a too level parameter is greater than the minimum greatminus value,this some desired cells may be excluded from the access level offset. candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted cell may become the target cell. This leads to handover failures or call drops. 2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the uplink receive level minus this parameter is greater than the minimum access level offset. None Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover, the priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold, the cell is listed in the candidate cells based on receive level. The cell takes a low priority for handovers.

None

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the edge handover can be triggered.

This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased. This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.

None

None

None

None

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. In other words, the edge handover algorithm is enabled. The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower the hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The layered hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold. If this parameter is set to Yes, a call is handed over to the target cell that has a higher priority than the serving cell. Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and In dual-band networking mode for densely populated urban adjacent channel interference. areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band. Considering the preceding factors, you can enable the Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed for the DCS1800 cell. Under normal conditions, this parameter is set to No. To support the rapid level drop handover, the BSC must have It is original recommended that this handover be applied only in the MR. special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions. If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.

Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban areas, common urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas; No for highspeed circumstances

When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which the MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal quality.

None

None

None

The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell reselect offset. The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS The value of CBQ affects the of the MS the constantly checks whether a access cell reselection is to required by system. referring to following conditions: Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below 0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large. C2isof an appropriate non-serving exceeds that of theas It recommended that you selectcell a greater value, such serving cell in in 5sthe andarea the with following conditions are met: 16, 20, or 25, heavy traffic, but a smaller  The such C2 ofas a new another LAC light minus CRH value, 2 or cell 3, ininthe area with traffic. An MS doesinnot pagings during (broadcast therespond systemto information 3 andlocation 4 of theupdate. serving Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection cell) exceeds C2 of the serving inparameter, 5s. To properly specify the value ofcell this it is is performed. A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of necessary to perform overall and long-term measurement If this parameter is 5 set a too small value, ping-pong the new cell minus dBto constantly exceeds the C2 of the on the entities involved regarding their processing location updates occursuch andas the signaling loadcapability on the SDCCH serving cell in 5s. capability and traffic, the processing of increases. A better cell BSC, existsand if the conditions are met.If a the MSC and theabove load on the A interface, Abis If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell that better cellUm exists, the MSHLR, reselects a cell,and does not go to interface, interface, and VLR. the camps onwithin forperiod a long time be be thegreater best after previous cell 5s. in The MS location update themay MSCnot must than the thatLA in changes. the BSC. In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update request within a long period. The larger thisreselects parameter is set,cell the(in larger the number of When the MS another the same LAC), the paging sub-channels in aT3212 cell and the smaller the number MS is restarted through timeout if the T3212 of the of MSs paging Setting this parameter new on celleach differs from sub-channel. that of the original cell. larger can parameter prolong thediffers average service of MS batteries When this in the cellslife of the same LAC, it but increase thethe delay paging messages and reduce is possible that MS of is identified as implicit off-line if the system performance. MS sends no location update request for a long period. In this case, system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though the called MS is on. None In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all cells. The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call drops. The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an If the of RACH a cell istosmall, T should MS is number not allowed. This conflicts conditioninapplies a dual-network be set to acell. great If the cell, number RACH conflicts a coverage Forvalue. a common this of parameter shouldinbe cell is large, T should be set to a small value. The increase set to 0. in T and S of prolongs the access time ofaccess an MS,ofthus affecting The value CBA affects the network an MS. the access performance of the whole network. Therefore, appropriate values should be selected for T and S. When the network traffic is heavy, the success rate of immediate assignment is low if the sum of S and T is low. Thus, the value of T should be properly adjusted to make the sum of S and T great. When Abis interface use the satellite transmission,this None parameter must be 32.

None

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.

If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel load and influence the access success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the radio resources too much, and influences the channel resource utilization. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the call reestablishment success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the assignment success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate. If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the handover success rate.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel resources and cause the congestion. If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the immediate assignment success rate.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intracell handover.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous handover is performed in intra-BSC handover; otherwise, the synchronous handover is performed. If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision might be made in TRX aiding detection; if the parameter is set too large, a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering of TRXparameter aiding function cellsmall initialization. If this is set after to a too value, the BSC initiates cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload message from the BTS. That is, the minimum receive level of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS sends the overload message to the BSC when a large number of MSs access the network. In this case, system failure may occur. None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider bandwidth is occupied by services. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used. The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It is recommended that the default value be used.

None

None If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. Thus, the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot access the network. If the value of this parameter is too small, great, the BTS sends an frequently reports overload indication messages the BSC. overload message to the BSC with a long interval.toThus, As a result, the BSCoccur. frequently reports overload indication system faults may messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow control. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends overload indication messages to the BSC only when a large number of MSs access the network and when the system resources are insufficient. Therefore, the access If the value this parameter too small, the requests on of the RACH and all is the messages onsignaling the PCH are traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of discarded. the BSC increases. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in time. If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF resource status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, RF resource status is not updated in time. Therefore, the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio resource indication messages are reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio resource status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time. None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.

None

If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is small.

None

For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and BTS3002C, this parameter is invalid. For other BTSs, this parameter is valid.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS power reduces too much. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction effect is not good. If the value of this parameter is too great, the average result cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value of this parameter is too small, the averaging is performed too frequently and resources are wasted.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that the BTS transmits at full power increases. The interference increases. The handover success rate, however, is increased to some extent.

For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and reported.

For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with two TRXs (O2 or S2), Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. The RF connection supports the configuration of the main and diversity antennas. This parameter is configured for only the BTS3002C.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded; conversely, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, andiscall maygreat easily occur. If this parameter set drop to a too value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of the UL Expected Level at HO Access.

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by thesome number of measurement reports. On receiving consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by thesome number of measurement reports. On receiving consecutive measurement reports, the

network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by thesome number of measurement reports. On receiving consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the dynamic power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the measurement report. On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the downlink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by thesome number of measurement reports. On receiving consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by thesome number of measurement reports. On receiving consecutive measurement reports, the

network calculates the average value of the downlink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by thesome number of measurement reports. On receiving consecutive measurement reports, the network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of measurement reports.

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, andiscall maygreat easily occur. If this parameter set drop to a too value, the uplink level

becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level at HO Access. If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the resources. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the history value in the interference measurement results increases.

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output power of the MS decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the output power of the MS increases. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of None the frequent TBF release increases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of current cell in the network caused by the MS activities, and the network still assigns the radio resources to the MS), the If this parameter is set to a lower value, the abnormal uplink network cannot release this TBF, thus wasting the network TBF release increases caused by the overflow of the N3103. resources. IfBased this parameter is set to a higher value, the release time of on the actual condition of existing network (for the uplinkthe TBFN3105 delaysoverflow due to no response of the example, caused by the badMS Umcaused If this is set toquality, a lower value, the link tolerance ofand the by theparameter bad Um interface thus occupying the link interface quality, the unstable transmission quality, network toof uplink errors decreases andadjust the probability of resources system. the MS activities), you should properly this parameter the frequent release increases. Based on the theTBF actual condition of not existing network (for to ensure downlink TBF does abnormally release If this is set to a higher the bad abnormal example, N3101 overflow caused by the Um TBF due toparameter thethe frequent overflow of thevalue, N3105. may occurquality, (such as MS hastransmission not receivedlink the quality, message of interface thethe unstable and current cell in the network caused by the MS activities, the the MS activities), you should properly adjust this parameter If parameter is set a higher value, this wastes network still thetouplink resources to the MS), the tothis ensure theassigns uplink TBF does not abnormally release due to wireless resources andofinfluences the the access network cannot release this thus wasting the network the frequent overflow the TBF, N3101. performance of other MSs in the network, thus causing the resources. useless signaling seizing the channel bandwidth and Based on the actual condition of existing network (for wasting resources. example,the thedownlink N3101 overflow caused by the bad Um If this parameter set to a lower value, the link uplink TBF and interface quality, is the unstable transmission quality, frequently releasesyou andshould establishes, thus increasing the the MS activities), properly adjust this parameter delay for the thenot Attach and Pingrelease services. to ensure thedelay uplinktests TBF of does abnormally due to If this parameter is setTBF aishigher value, the release delay The original downlink released immediately and the frequent overflow oftothe N3101. of the uplink TBFtoincreases, thus wastingdownlink the uplink cannot be used transmit subsequent data. resources. Therefore, a new TBF must be established. The original If this set the TBF of downlink TBF alsois belower usedvalue, for a new requirement If this parameter parameter iscannot set to to a a higher value, thisuplink can increase frequently releases and establishes, thus increasing the uplink data transmission. Therefore, the duration and the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the delay forthus the greatly delay of thethe Attach and Ping success rate of the tests TBF establishment are greatly affected. PACCH, reducing downlink TBF services. The most optimized should beMS a little greater than the establishment time; value however, if the needs to send new intervaldata, between two the discontinuous uplink uplink because BSC6000 does nottransmissions. support the uplink establishment function on the uplink at present, the reserved uplink TBF must be released and a new TBF must be established to transmit the new data. Therefore, the overall transmission performance decreases. If this parameter is set to a lower value, this can decrease the probability of is establishing the downlink on the If this parameter set to a higher value, theTBF load-based PACCH. The downlink TBF must establish on the CCCH, thus reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to increasing the the establishment a lower value, load-based time. reselection is triggered easily. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the critical reselectionisisset triggered easily. If this parameter to a higher value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the critical reselection is triggered easily.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases, and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the critical reselection is triggered easily. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of cell reselections increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the number of cell reselections decreases. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the probability of the cell reselection increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the probability of the cell reselection decreases. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision of decision may be reduced; if this parameter is set to a higher value, the decision may not be performed immediately.

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight of the previous signal level increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the weight of current signal level increases.

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier for the MS to reselect this cell; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell. If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult to trigger the load-based reselection; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it is easier to trigger the load-based reselection. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS cannot be handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time longer than this value; conversely, the time greatly reduces. If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can be handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a higher level; conversely, the MS can be handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a lower level.

The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong reselection between cells.

None

None This parameter is configured according to the congestion of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the underlaid voice services are congested, the overlaid-tounderlaid subcell handover is only allowed; if the overlaid voice services are congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid handover is only allowed. None

None

None

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS reduces.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS reduces.

None

For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set the parameter to MCS6; for the cell with the poor Um interface quality, set the parameter to MCS4.

None

None

None

The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is; otherwise, the smaller the proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is.

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

None

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to increase the CS type.

None

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle Abis timeslots cannot be fully used. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis timeslots may be applied frequently. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS services are affected. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS services are affected when there are too many PS services.

None If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the dynamic channel resources may be wasted when there are no services for a long time. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being released. Therefore, the dynamic channel is sent This parameter is configured according to request the congestion frequently. counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice

services. If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is converted at the UL cell. If the OL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs converted at the OL cell. established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher. If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the downlink bandwidth each subscriber is lower. If this parameter is set tofor a lower value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is lower. If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.

If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic channels. If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there are excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This affects CS services. If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects PS services.

None

If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is difficult for the cell to be selected. If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is easy for the cell to be selected. If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to select this cell during cell reselection. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the power consumption and radiation of the MS are high. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may not be able to access the channel. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the coverage area of the cell is large. The MS on the edge of the cell may not be able to access the system. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the coverage area of the cell is small. The usage of cell resources decreases. None

None

In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the period when cell reselection is prohibited increases. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period when cell reselection is prohibited decreases.

None

None

None

In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs.

None

None

None If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access the cell. Therefore, system may be value, overloaded. If this parameter is the set to an excessive it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access the cell. Therefore, system may be value, overloaded. If this parameter is the set to an excessive it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access the cell. Therefore, system may be value, overloaded. If this parameter is the set to an excessive it is difficult for an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to parameter access the is cell. too many MSsthe may access If this setHowever, to an excessive value, MS sends the cell. Therefore, the system overloaded. a new Channel Request within amay longbe interval after the

channel request fails, thus reducing access collisions but slowing down the MS access speed. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS sends a new Channel Request within a short interval after the If this parameter is setthus to an excessive value, MS needs channel request fails, accelerating the MSthe access to waitbut for adding a long time before sending the next request. This speed access collisions. may affect MS services. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a response is sent, but the MS has not received it because of transmission delay. In this case, the MS also resends the access request. None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information may be missing. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many bandwidth resources. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information may be missing. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time bandwidth resources. after the measurement report is sent. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS may stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be affected. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS enters the DRX mode and may send the measurement report The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows: frequently. 1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage, Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. The value range 0-20 dB is recommended. 2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is recommended. If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area of the micro cell is large.

None

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the extension measurement report is sent frequently. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, measurement information is not obtained timely.

None

None

None

None

None

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the EGPRS MS is shortened.

None

None

None

None

When the radio operating environment is good, decreasing the parameter value improves the transmission rate. When the radio operating environment is poor, increasing the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally releasing TBFs. PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. Usually, PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC. However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX.

None If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. Thus, many radio resources are not used but occupied. If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the speed of the sliding window decreases and the probability of the uplink TBF transmission countdown increases, thus decreasing the performance of uplink transmission. To make this value more accurate, you need to estimate the delay in the transmission between the MS and the BSC6 first. NoneThis value is set based on the transmission delay.

It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment If this parameter issupport set to AGCHs athe higher theburst. TBF resources message PCHs and invalue, non-DRX mode than in Some MSson doallnot 11-bit access (including and timeslots) reserved mode, for a long DRX mode.TFI During the periodare of non-DRX the time. TBF If Therefore, 8bit is recommended. no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not establishment time decreases, but the power consumption used for a long time. of thebut MSoccupied increases. If is set smaller value, the MS releases In the DRXtimer mode, theto MSa monitors paging messages onlythe on TBF resources within a shorter period. However, if the the home paging group, and then receives the Immediate network sends new downlink PDU data packets, theAGCH network Assignment message on all the paging blocks and must initiateblocks. a paging immediate assignment procedure. reservation TheorTBF establishment time increases, Therefore, the consumption downlink TBFof establishment takes a longer but the power the MS decreases. period. If this parameter is set to a modest value, the TBF If the downloadtime dataincreases packets from thepower network are not establishment but the consumption of If the timer is T3192 set toIfadoes lower value, the MSnetwork can the received and not expire, directly the MS decreases. this parameter isthe set to andetect excessive TBF establishment failureAssignment within a shorter period. If the TBF sends a Packet Downlink message to the establish value, the TBF establishment time decreases but power establishment the average delaythe of TBF packet access is a new downlink TBF,MS thus shortening establishment consumption offails, the increases. short, time. but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment decreases. In addition, small timer On one hand, the value of the T3192 timerthe depends on the value increases the probability of the retransmission of the average transmission interval between two successive packet access downlink data. request, thus increasing the probability of reassignment by the PCU andto wasting system resources. On the other hand, you need comprehensively analyze If the timermodels is set to higher value, thethe MSservice takes aload longer the traffic of athe cell and take of the period detect the TBFWhen establishment failure. If are the TBF cell intotoconsideration. network resources establishment fails, average delay of packet access is sufficient, that is thethe GPRS congestion rate is low, the Currently, the GPRS network is not configured with theT3192 Gs long, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio should beor set toPCCCH. a large value, shortening the time to Mode interface the Therefore, Network Operation environment increases. establish newby TBFs and improving data transmission rate. II is selected default.